JP6891501B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board is provided, and the game ball enters the operating port (starting ball entry means) to perform an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery. A gaming machine to be executed is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1). When, for example, the gaming machine wins the jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-074175

However, after shifting the gaming state to the specific control state, the gaming machine follows the same flow regardless of whether or not the player's action is intervened, and then starts the game in the specific control state. There is a problem that the series of flow from shifting the game state to starting the game in the specific control state becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game decreases.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of expanding the options of a player and increasing the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Gaming machine of the present invention, a firing means for firing the game ball towards the game area formed in front of the game board, the game ball flowing down the game region is a possible ball entrance, on the basis of the ball entrance A gaming machine including a starting ball entry means capable of executing a predetermined lottery and a gaming state transition means capable of shifting the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player based on the result of the predetermined lottery. and playing ball ball entrance can open flowing down the game area, and a playing ball impossible ball entrance closure state flowing down the game area, and from the open state based on the ball entrance of game ball to the closed state closing a first ball entrance means for migration, based on a result of a predetermined drawing, to allow temporarily ball entrance of game ball flowing down the game area, the first ball entrance means based on the ball entrance of game ball and a second ball entrance means capable transition from state to an open state, a gaming state transition means, after migrating the gaming state to a specific control state, ball entrance of game ball into at least a first ball entrance hand stage A specific control starting means capable of starting a game in a specific control state based on the above is provided.

According to the present invention, the choices of the player can be expanded, and the degree of attention of the player to the game can be improved.

Front view of the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. Front view of the game board Enlarged view of the vicinity of the right variable ball entry mechanism Diagram showing the movement of the game ball on the discharge route and the crune route Enlarged view of the vicinity of Kroon from above View of non-electric accessory from the back side of the game board Enlarged view of the vicinity of non-electric accessories Enlarged view of the vicinity of non-electric accessories Side view of non-electric accessory Diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine Diagram showing the contents of each counter used in the internal lottery A diagram showing a winning / failing table that stores the values of random numbers that win the jackpot. The figure which shows the distribution table which stored the value of the random number related to the distribution destination of a jackpot type The figure which shows the flowchart of timer interrupt processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the ball entry process for a round game execution gate The figure which shows the flowchart of the winning process for a working opening The figure which shows the flowchart of a normal process Diagram showing the flowchart of the main process The figure which shows the flowchart of the game time control process The figure which shows the flowchart of the data setting process The figure which shows the flowchart of the fluctuation start processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the game state transition process The figure which shows the flowchart of the setting process of the number of rounds The figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening opening and closing process The figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening opening process The figure which shows the flowchart of the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the voice emission control device and the display control device The figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing executed by the voice light emission control device The figure which shows the flowchart of the production decision processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the process of determining the number of rounds Diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the game state, etc. The figure which shows the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-electric accessory, and the right side variable ball entry mechanism when the opening / closing execution mode is changed when the non-electric accessory is not opened The figure which shows the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-electric accessory, and the right side variable ball entry mechanism when the opening / closing execution mode is changed when the non-electric accessory is opened. Front view of the game board according to the second embodiment of the present invention. An exploded perspective view of the vicinity of the crune as viewed from diagonally above. Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine The figure which shows the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-electric accessory, and the right side variable ball entry mechanism when the opening / closing execution mode is changed when the non-electric accessory is not opened A perspective view showing the flow in which the game ball is guided to the discharge passage after the ball enters the 4-round execution gate. A perspective view showing the flow in which the game ball is guided to the connecting passage after the ball enters the 4-round execution gate. The figure which shows the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-electric accessory, and the right side variable ball entry mechanism when the opening / closing execution mode is changed when the non-electric accessory is not opened. A perspective view showing a flow in which a game ball is guided to a discharge passage after a ball enters the 16-round execution gate. A perspective view showing a flow in which a game ball is guided to a connecting passage after a ball enters the 16-round execution gate. Front view of the game board according to the third embodiment of the present invention. An exploded perspective view of the vicinity of the crune as viewed from diagonally above. The figure which shows the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-electric accessory, and the right side variable ball entry mechanism when the opening / closing execution mode is changed when the non-electric accessory is not opened. Top view of the crune when a ball enters the 4-round execution gate The figure which shows the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-electric accessory, and the right side variable ball entry mechanism when the opening / closing execution mode is changed when the non-electric accessory is not opened. Top view of the crune when a ball enters the 16-round execution gate Front view of the game board according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. Enlarged view of the vicinity of Kroon from above Front view of the game board according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. The figure which shows the internal structure of a non-electric accessory A diagram showing the internal structure of a non-electric accessory when a ball enters the 16-round execution gate. The figure which shows the internal structure of a non-electric accessory when a ball enters a non-electric accessory The figure which shows the internal structure of the non-electric accessory after the ball enters the non-electric accessory.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
The pachinko machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine that is a kind of gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine main body rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the front (front side). It has 12 and.

The gaming machine main body 12 is arranged in front of an inner frame (not shown) supported by an outer frame 11 so that one of the left and right side portions can be rotated as a support side, and both left and right sides. The front door frame 13 is supported by the inner frame so that one of the portions can be rotated forward with one of the portions as the support side, and the front door frame 13 is arranged behind the inner frame. It is equipped with a back pack unit (not shown) that is supported by an inner frame so that it can rotate to.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device (not shown) provided at its rotating tip. This locking device has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the outer frame 11, and also has a function of locking the front door frame 13 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame. Have. These locked states are released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 14 provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

The front door frame 13 has a substantially elliptical window portion 21 provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame, and a window panel 22 fitted in the window portion 21. In the present embodiment, the window panel 22 is made colorless and transparent by glass, but may be formed colorless and transparent by synthetic resin or the like.
Further, the front door frame 13 has a display lamp unit 23 provided above the window unit 21 as a part of light emitting means composed of various lamp units provided around the window unit 21, and a display lamp unit. A speaker unit 24 provided on both the left and right sides of the 23 and outputting sound effects and the like according to the game situation, and an upper bulging portion 25 and a lower bulging portion 26 provided below the window portion 21 are provided. There is.

The upper bulging portion 25 and the lower bulging portion 26 are arranged side by side on the upper and lower sides, and are provided so as to bulge forward together.
The upper bulging portion 25 has an upper plate 25a provided inside so as to open upward. The upper plate 25a temporarily stores the game balls paid out by the payout device 71 (see FIG. 11) provided in the back pack unit, and moves to the game ball launch mechanism 81 (see FIG. 11) side while arranging them in a row. It has a function to guide.
The lower bulging portion 26 also has a lower plate 26a provided inside so as to open upward. The lower plate 26a has a function of storing excess game balls in the upper plate 25a.

Further, the front door frame 13 includes a firing handle 27 as a launching means provided on the right side of the lower plate 26a. The launch handle 27 launches a game ball from the game ball launch mechanism 81 provided below the inner frame toward the game area provided above the inner frame by being operated by the player of the pachinko machine 10. To do. The firing handle 27 changes the firing intensity of the gaming ball to be launched toward the gaming area, that is, the firing momentum, by changing the amount of rotation operation thereof.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 31 has an inner rail portion 32 and an outer rail portion 33 attached to the surface thereof, and is mounted on the inner frame. The game area described above is formed on the game board 31 so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33. In this game area, substantially the entire area can be visually recognized from the front through the window portion 21.
The inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 constitute a guide rail 34 for the game ball to the game area, and the guide rail 34 is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 by the player rotating the launch handle 27. Guide the played game ball to the upper part of the game area.

The guide rail 34 is formed so that its exit portion is arranged on one side of the game area and faces the upper center of the game area. Therefore, the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side as the amount of rotation of the firing handle 27 by the player increases. It shifts to the side of the side. In the present embodiment, the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is provided on the left side portion of the game area.

The game board 31 has a plurality of large and small openings formed so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing in the game area. Further, the game board 31 includes a general winning opening 35, an upper operating opening (first starting ball entry portion) 36, a lower operating opening (second starting ball entry portion) 37, and a variable winning device 38 provided in each opening. It has an out port 39 and a non-electric accessory 51. The non-electric accessory 51 is provided on the lower right side of the general winning opening 35. Further, the game board 31 has an opening 311 provided on the lower right side of the lower operating port 37 and an opening 312 provided on the lower side of the non-electric accessory 51. Further, the game board 31 includes a through gate 41 provided on each of the left side of the central portion and the right side of the central portion, a main display device 42 provided on the upper right side, a variable display unit 43 provided in the central portion, and the like. Have. Further, the game board 31 has a large number of nails 44 planted for appropriately dispersing or adjusting the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (roles) such as a windmill in the game area. ing.

Each of the general winning opening 35, the upper operating opening 36, the lower operating opening 37, and the various winning openings of the variable winning device 38 includes detection sensors 40a to 40d (see FIG. 11) for detecting the entry of a game ball. The detection sensors 40a to 40d are arranged on the back side of the game board 31. Specifically, the general winning opening 35 is provided with a detection sensor 40a, the upper operating port 36 is provided with a detection sensor 40b, the lower operating port 37 is provided with a detection sensor 40c, and the variable winning device 38 is a detection sensor 40d. It has. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40a to 40d. The detection sensors 40a to 40d may be any type as long as they can individually detect the winning of the game ball, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor or the like can be adopted.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 pays out 10 prize balls when a ball enters the general prize opening 35. The pachinko machine 10 pays out three prize balls when the ball enters the upper operating port 36 and when the ball enters the lower operating port 37. The pachinko machine 10 pays out 15 prize balls when a ball is entered into the variable winning device 38. The number of these prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls at the operating ports 36 and 37 may be different.

The out port 39 is provided at the bottom of the game area of the game board 31. The game balls that have not entered the various winning openings and the like are discharged from the game area through the out openings 39. Further, the out port 39 includes a detection sensor 40e (see FIG. 11) that detects the entry of a game ball, and the detection sensor 40e is arranged on the back side of the game board 31. The pachinko machine 10 does not pay out the prize balls when the balls enter the out ports 39, unlike the cases where the balls enter the various winning ports.

The non-electric accessory 51 is provided on the lower left side of the game area of the game board 31. Further, the non-electric accessory 51 includes a detection sensor 40f (see FIG. 11) for detecting the entry of a game ball, and the detection sensor 40f is arranged on the back side of the game board 31. The pachinko machine 10 does not pay out the prize balls when the non-electric accessory 51 is entered, unlike the case where the balls are entered into various winning openings. The non-electric accessory 51 will be described in detail later.
In addition, the player hits the left with the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 27 as a medium, and the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is set from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the game area. By shifting to the upper left, the game ball can be guided to the upper operating port 36, the non-electric accessory 51, or the like (left-handed route).

Each through gate 41 includes a detection sensor 40 g (see FIG. 11) that detects the entry of a game ball, and the detection sensor 40 g is arranged on the back side of the game board 31. The pachinko machine 10 does not pay out the prize balls when the balls enter the through gates 41, unlike the case where the balls enter the various winning openings.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is discharged not only from the game area after passing through the opening but also from the game area after passing through the opening. It also includes a mode in which the flow of the game area is continued without flow. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish it from the entry of the game ball into the out opening 39, the entry of the game ball into various winning openings is also referred to as a winning. Further, entering the through gate 41 means that after passing through a gate provided in the game area, the ball continues to flow down the game area without being discharged from the game area. The entry into the through gate 41 is also referred to as winning in the same manner as the entry into various winning openings.

The upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 31. Each of the operating ports 36 and 37 opens upward together so that the game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and the upper operating port 36 is arranged above and the lower operating port 37 is arranged below. It is installed side by side in the vertical direction. The lower operating port 37 has an electric accessory 37a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

The electric accessory 37a is connected to an electric accessory drive unit 37b mounted on the back side of the game board 31. The electric accessory 37a is set to either a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) or an open state (supported state or guided state) by being driven by the electric accessory driving unit 37b. The closed state is a state in which the lower operating port 37 is closed by bringing the upper ends of the electric accessory 37a close to each other in the left-right direction. The open state is a state in which the lower operating port 37 is opened by separating the upper end of the electric accessory 37a in the left-right direction.

Here, when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state, the distance between the upper end of the electric accessory 37a and the bottom surface of the upper operating port 36 is narrower than that of one game ball. Further, when the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the distance between the upper end of the electric accessory 37a and the bottom surface of the upper operating port 36 is wider than that of one game ball. Therefore, the game ball cannot win the lower operating port 37 when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state, and may win the lower operating port 37 when the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state. it can.

In addition, in the electric accessory 37a, instead of the closed state and the open state described above, a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to win a prize in the lower operating port 37 (a state in which the game ball can be entered unlike the closed state) and a lower state. The operating port 37 may be configured to switch from a state in which a game ball is likely to win a prize. Further, the lower operating port 37 may be configured such that such switching is performed not by setting the electric accessory 37a but by the displacement of the lower operating port 37. In the case of such a configuration, the lower operating port 37 may be configured. 37 does not have to be provided with the electric accessory 37a.

The variable winning device 38 drives a large winning opening 38a that opens upward so that a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, an opening / closing door 38b for opening / closing the large winning opening 38a, and an opening / closing door 38b. It is equipped with a variable winning drive unit 38c.
The player hits the right with the maximum amount of rotation of the launch handle 27, and sets the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side of the side portion, the game ball can be guided to the variable winning device 38 while avoiding the variable display unit 43 and the like (right-handed route).

Here, the game board 31 includes a cover 381 provided so as to cover the front side of the variable winning device 38. The cover 381 is provided around a transparent (or translucent) transparent panel 381a so that the variable winning device 38 can be seen from the front side, and the transparent panel 381a, and is opaquely formed. It includes a panel 381b.
Therefore, the player can visually recognize the variable winning device 38 from the front through the transparent panel 381a and the window portion 21.

The grand prize opening 38a is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. As described above, the large winning opening 38a includes a detection sensor 40d that detects the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection result.

The opening / closing door 38b is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and is provided on the game board 31 so as to close the opening of the large winning opening 38a. The opening / closing door 38b is in a closed state in which the opening of the grand prize opening 38a is closed by advancing toward the window panel 22 and protruding from the game board 31, and is retracted toward the inside of the game board 31. By burying it in 31, it has an open state in which the opening of the large winning opening 38a is opened.
The variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening / closing door 38b to either an open state or a closed state by driving the opening / closing door 38b.

Specifically, the opening / closing door 38b is normally set in a closed state in which a game ball cannot win a prize. Then, when the shift to the open / close execution mode is won in the internal lottery and the shift to the open / close execution mode is performed, the open / close door 38b is set to the open state in which the game ball can win a prize.
The opening / closing execution mode (specific control state) is a mode in which the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state and a game ball can be inserted into the large winning opening 38a. Further, in the opening / closing execution mode, after the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state and then set to the closed state again, it is referred to as one round game.
As described above, the variable winning device 38 has an open state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is entered and a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is not entered. It functions as an opening / closing ball entry means for paying out game balls.

The main display device 42 has a main display unit 45 and a display unit 46 for accessories, and has a plurality of display devices such as a segment display unit in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner and a dot display unit. It is arranged and configured.
The main display device 42 is provided on the game board 31 so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. That is, the main display device 42 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the window panel 22. Further, the distance between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22 is narrower than that of one game ball. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from falling between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from falling in front of the main display device 42.

The main display unit 45 is a first result display unit 45a for displaying the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper operating port 36, and the inside performed based on the winning of the lower operating port 37. A second result display unit 45b for displaying the result of the lottery is provided (see FIG. 11). The main display unit 45 may further include a round display unit for clearly indicating the number of round games in the open / close execution mode when the open / close execution mode is set (or the open / close execution mode is set). ..

The first result display unit 45a executes the variation display of the pattern triggered by the winning of the upper operating port 36, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the internal lottery is performed based on the winning of the upper operating port 36. Display the result of. When the result of this internal lottery is the result corresponding to the shift to the open / close execution mode, the first result display unit 45a displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.
The second result display unit 45b executes the variation display of the pattern triggered by the winning of the lower operating port 37, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the internal lottery is performed based on the winning of the lower operating port 37. Display the result of. When the result of this internal lottery is the result corresponding to the shift to the open / close execution mode, the second result display unit 45b displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37 function as starting ball entering means for entering the game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters.

The accessory display unit 46 executes a variable display of the pattern triggered by winning a prize in each through gate 41, and as a result of stopping the variable display, an internal lottery is performed based on the winning in each through gate 41. Display the result of. When the result of the internal lottery is the result corresponding to the transition to the electric service open state, the accessory display unit 46 displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the electric service open state. In this electric service open state, the electric accessory 37a provided in the lower operating port 37 is in the open state in a predetermined mode.

In the present embodiment, the main display unit 45 and the accessory display unit 46 are composed of a segment display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device, the organic EL display device, the CRT, and the like. It may be composed of other types of display devices such as a dot matrix. Further, as the pattern to be variablely displayed on the main display unit 45 and the accessory display unit 46, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variablely displayed, and a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed. , Or a configuration in which multiple types of colors are switched and displayed can be adopted.

The variable display unit 43 includes a symbol display device 47 that variablely displays (variable display or switching display) a symbol that is a type of symbol. Further, the variable display unit 43 includes a center frame 48 arranged so as to surround the symbol display device 47. The upper portion of the center frame 48 is provided so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front surface side thereof. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from falling in front of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and does not cause the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G is lowered due to the fall of the game ball. It is composed.

The symbol display device 47 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display. The symbol display device 47 starts the variable display of the symbol based on the winning of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. That is, when the symbol display device 47 executes the variation display on the first result display unit 45a of the main display unit 45 and the variation display on the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45, the symbol display device 47 may execute the variation display. The variable display is executed accordingly.
The symbol display device 47 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or another display device such as a CRT.

The center frame 48 includes four first holding lamp portions 49a provided in the upper area of the symbol display device 47 and four second holding lamp portions 49b provided in the area on the right side of the first holding lamp portion 49a. , It is provided with four third holding lamp portions 49c provided in the upper region of the first holding lamp portion 49a.

The first holding lamp unit 49a is a portion that displays the number of holdings of the winning game balls in the upper operating port 36, and lights up according to the number of holdings. The first holding lamp unit 49a can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the first result display unit 45a and the symbol display device 47.
The second holding lamp unit 49b is a portion that displays the number of holdings of the winning game balls in the lower operating port 37, and lights up according to the number of holdings. The second holding lamp unit 49b can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the second result display unit 45b and the symbol display device 47.
The third hold lamp unit 49c is a portion that displays the number of hold of the game balls that have won a prize in each through gate 41, and lights up according to the number of hold. The third holding lamp unit 49c can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the accessory display unit 46.
The holding lamp units 49a to 49c may have other configurations such as being displayed as an image on a part of the symbol display device 47 described later.

Further, the center frame 48 includes a right-side variable entry mechanism 52 provided in the lower right region of the symbol display device 47, and a crune 53 provided in the left region of the right-side variable entry mechanism 52. There is.
The right variable ball entry mechanism 52 allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the inside of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, and then guides the ball to the crune 53 and discharges the game ball to the outside of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52. It has a function of guiding the game ball that has entered the inside of the right variable entry mechanism 52 to the crune route or the discharge route by switching between the discharge route and the discharge route.
The player hits the right with the maximum amount of rotation of the launch handle 27, and sets the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side of the side portion, the game ball can be guided to the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 while avoiding the variable display unit 43 and the like (right-handed route).

FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the right variable ball entry mechanism.
As shown in FIG. 3, the right-side variable ball-entry mechanism 52 includes an introduction unit 521 that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the inside of the right-side variable ball-entry mechanism 52, and a right-side variable ball-entry mechanism at the introduction unit 521. A guide passage 522 that guides the game ball guided to the entrance of 52, a switching unit 523 that switches the destination of the game ball guided by the guide passage 522, and a discharge port 524 provided at the guide destination of the guide passage 522. It is equipped with a guide rail 525 (see FIG. 4).

The introduction unit 521 has a blade member 521a provided on the game board 31 so as to close the entrance formed on the right side of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, and a blade member centered on an axis orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 31. A pin 521b that rotatably supports the 521a and a blade member driving unit 521c that drives the blade member 521a are provided.

The blade member 521a rotates counterclockwise around the pin 521b to close the entrance of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 (dashed line in the figure) and rotates clockwise around the pin 521b. It has an open state (solid line in the figure) in which the entrance of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 is opened by moving (see the arrow in the figure). In the open state, the blade member 521a is inclined so as to descend toward the inlet side of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52.
The blade member driving unit 521c sets the blade member 521a to either a closed state or an open state by driving the blade member 521a.

Here, the blade member 521a is repeatedly set to the closed state and the open state at a predetermined cycle. In other words, the blade member 521a is intermittently opened and closed at a predetermined cycle.
In the present embodiment, the blade member 521a is repeatedly set to a closed state of 1.5 sec and an open state of 0.5 sec. Therefore, the blade member 521a is intermittently opened and closed at a cycle of 2 sec.
The introduction unit 521 may be configured so that the game ball flowing down the game area can enter the inside of the right variable entry mechanism 52, and the timing of opening / closing the blade member 521a and the opening / closing of the opening / closing unit 521a may be started. The cycle can be set arbitrarily.

Therefore, when the blade member 521a is set to the open state by the blade member driving unit 521c, the game ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 through the blade member 521a by utilizing the inclination of the blade member 521a. (Solid line in the figure).
On the other hand, when the blade member 521a is set to the closed state by the blade member driving unit 521c, the game ball does not enter the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 (dashed line in the figure).

The guide passage 522 is formed with a width so that a plurality of game balls cannot pass through the passage at the same time. Further, the guide passage 522 is bifurcated in the middle thereof, and has an upstream guide passage 522a located on the upstream side of the branch and two downstream guide passages 522b and 522c located on the downstream side. ..
The guide passage 522 is formed to be transparent (or translucent) so that the inside thereof can be seen from the front side.

The upstream side guide passage 522a guides the game ball that has been entered into the entrance of the right variable entry mechanism 52 by the introduction unit 521 from the entrance of the right variable entry mechanism 52 to the branch position of the guide passage 522. The upstream guide passage 522a is inclined so as to descend from the entrance of the right variable entry mechanism 52 toward the branch position of the guide passage 522. Therefore, the game ball reaches the branch position of the guide passage 522 along the upstream guide passage 522a by utilizing the inclination of the upstream guide passage 522a.

The downstream guide passage 522b is provided at a position close to the branch position of the guide passage 522. Further, the downstream guide passage 522b is formed along the vertical downward direction so as to drop the game ball from the branch position of the guide passage 522. The downstream guide passage 522b guides the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 522 through the upstream guide passage 522a to the discharge port 524.
The downstream guide passage 522c is provided at a position far from the branch position of the guide passage 522. Further, the downstream guide passage 522c is formed so that the game ball extends from the branch position of the guide passage 522 to the guide rail 525. The downstream guide passage 522c guides the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 522 through the upstream guide passage 522a to the guide rail 525 (see FIG. 4).

Here, the right-side variable ball entry mechanism 52 includes a detection sensor 40h (see FIG. 11) for detecting the entry of a game ball, and the detection sensor 40h is arranged on the back side of the game board 31. Specifically, the detection sensor 40h detects the entry of the game ball into the downstream guide passage 522c. The pachinko machine 10 does not pay out the prize balls when the ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, unlike the case where the balls enter the various winning openings. Further, the detection sensor 40h may be any one as long as it can individually detect the winning of the game ball, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor or the like can be adopted.

The switching portion 523 rotatably supports the plate 523a provided on the game board 31 so as to close the entrance of the downstream guide passage 522c and the plate 523a about an axis orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 31. It includes a pin 523b and a plate drive unit 523c that drives the plate 523a.

The plate 523a rotates clockwise around the pin 523b to close the entrance of the downstream guide passage 522b (two-dot chain line in the figure) and rotates counterclockwise around the pin 523b. By doing so, the entrance of the downstream guide passage 522c is closed and the entrance of the downstream guide passage 522b is opened (solid line in the figure). In the closed state, the plate 523a is inclined so as to descend toward the downstream guide passage 522c side.
The plate driving unit 523c sets the plate 523a to either a closed state or an open state by driving the plate 523a.

Therefore, when the plate 523a is set to the open state by the plate drive unit 523c, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 522 is guided to the entrance of the downstream guide passage 522b and then reaches the discharge port 524. You will be guided (solid line in the figure). After that, the game ball is discharged to the outside (game area) of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 via the discharge port 524 (discharge route).
On the other hand, when the plate 523a is set to the closed state by the plate drive unit 523c, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 522 travels downstream along the plate 523a by utilizing the inclination of the plate 523a. After being guided to the entrance of the side guide passage 522c, it is guided to the guide rail 525 (two-dot chain line in the figure). After that, the game ball is guided to the crune 53 via the guide rail 525 (see FIG. 4) (cruin route).

Here, the plate 523a is normally set in an open state (discharge route) in which the game ball is not guided to the crune 53. Then, when the shift to the open / close execution mode is won in the internal lottery and the shift to the open / close execution mode is performed, the plate 523a is set to the closed state (cruin route) in which the game ball is guided to the crune 53.
Further, when the detection sensor 40h described above detects the entry of the game ball into the downstream guide passage 522c, the plate 523a is in an open state (discharge route) in which the game ball is not guided to the crune 53. Is set again to.
As described above, in the present embodiment, the crune 53 flows down the game area based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. Functions as a variable ball entry means that allows the ball to enter temporarily.

FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the movement of the game ball on the discharge route and the crune route. Specifically, FIGS. 4 (A) and 4 (B) are diagrams showing the movement of the game ball on the discharge route, and FIGS. 4 (C) and 4 (D) are diagrams showing the movement of the game ball on the crune route. Is.
When the blade member 521a is set to the closed state, the game ball does not enter the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 as shown in FIG. 4 (A) (see the arrow in the figure). This is the same whether it is an excretion route or a crune route.

On the other hand, when the blade member 521a is set to the open state, the game ball travels through the blade member 521a by utilizing the inclination of the blade member 521a as shown in FIGS. 4 (B) and 4 (C). Then, the ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 52.
When the plate 523a is set to the open state and set as the discharge route, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 522 is guided to the discharge port 524 as shown in FIG. 4 (B). (See the arrow in the figure). After that, the game ball is discharged to the outside (game area) of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 via the discharge port 524.

The game ball discharged to the outside of the right variable entry mechanism 52 via the discharge port 524 can be moved to the upper operating port 36, the lower operating port 37, and the out port 39 by changing the falling direction with the nail 44. It will enter the ball.
In the present embodiment, the game ball discharged to the outside of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 via the discharge port 524 has entered the upper operating port 36, the lower operating port 37, and the out port 39. However, for example, the ball may be designed to enter only the out port 39. In short, the flow path of the game ball after being discharged into the game area may be designed in any way.
Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball is discharged to the game area through the discharge port 524, but the route is the same as that of the game ball that has entered the out port 39, for example, without being discharged to the game area. It may be collected through.

Further, when the plate 523a is set to the closed state and set to the crune route, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 522 is guided to the guide rail 525 as shown in FIG. 4 (C). (See the arrow in the figure). After that, the game ball is guided to the crune 53 via the guide rail 525 as shown in FIG. 4 (D).

FIG. 5 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the crune as viewed from above.
As shown in FIG. 5, the crune 53 is provided along a disk-shaped rolling surface 531 for rolling a game ball guided to the croon 53 via a guide rail 525, and a peripheral edge of the rolling surface 531. It is provided with a side wall 532.
The guide rail 525 guides the game ball to the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532.

The rolling surface 531 is formed with three holes 533A to 533C formed at a predetermined distance from the center thereof and at equal intervals from each other, and holes 533A to 533C formed at the center thereof. It is provided with a protrusion 534 having three side surfaces that incline so as to descend toward the 533C side. Further, the rolling surface 531 is inclined so as to descend from the side wall 532 side toward each hole 533A to 533C side (see FIG. 4).
Therefore, the game ball guided to the crune 53 via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532 and then enters any of the holes 533A to 533C (FIG. FIG. See middle arrow A).

Each of the holes 533A to 533C includes detection sensors 40i to 40k (see FIG. 11) for detecting the entry of a game ball, and the detection sensors 40i to 40k are arranged on the back side of the game board 31. Specifically, the detection sensor 40i detects the entry of the game ball into the hole 533A, the detection sensor 40j detects the entry of the game ball into the hole 533B, and the detection sensor 40k enters the hole 533C. Detects the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 10 does not pay out the prize balls when the balls enter the holes 533A to 533C, unlike the case where the balls enter the various winning openings. Further, the detection sensors 40i to 40k may be any as long as they can individually detect the winning of the game ball, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor or the like can be adopted.

Each of the holes 533A to 533C wins the transition to the open / close execution mode in the internal lottery, and when the transition to the open / close execution mode is performed, it is an opportunity to start the round game. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 wins the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in the internal lottery, and after the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, when a ball enters each of the holes 533A to 533C, the opening / closing door 38b Is set to the open state, and execution of a predetermined number of round games is started.

Specifically, when the pachinko machine 10 enters the hole 533A, the pachinko machine 10 starts executing the 16 round games. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 starts executing the 16 round games in the hole 533A. A mark is displayed around the hole 533A to suggest that.
Further, since the pachinko machine 10 starts executing the four round games when the ball enters the holes 533B and 533C, the pachinko machine 10 starts executing the four round games in the holes 533B and 533C. The mark is not displayed to suggest that it should be done.

Further, the crune 53 is connected to the hole 533A formed on the front side (front side) of the game board 31, and as shown by the arrow B in the figure, the game ball enters the hole 533A and falls downward. Is connected to the connecting passage 535 that guides the non-electric accessory 51 to the two holes 533B and 533C formed on the back side (back side) of the game board 31, and as shown by the arrow C in the figure, the holes. It is provided with a discharge passage 536 for ejecting a game ball that has entered the 533B and 533C and has fallen downward into the game area through an opening 311 (see FIG. 2).

FIG. 6 is a view of the non-electric accessory viewed from the back side of the game board. FIG. 9 is a side view of the non-electric accessory.
As shown in FIGS. 6 and 9, the non-electric accessory 51 is provided on a pair of upper blade members 511 provided above the game board 31 so as to face each other in the horizontal direction, and at the lower end of each upper blade member 511. A pair of rotating shafts 512 that are fixed and rotatably provided around an axis orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 31, and a pair of plate-shaped bodies 513 with one end fixed to each rotating shaft 512. Each rotating shaft 512 is provided with a pair of upper gears 514 fixed concentrically.

Further, the non-electric accessory 51 is fixed to a pair of lower blade members 515 provided below each upper blade member 511 so as to face each other in the horizontal direction and an upper end portion of each lower blade member 515, and also plays a game. A pair of rotating shafts 516 rotatably provided around an axis orthogonal to the board surface of the board 31 and a pair of rotating shafts 516 provided so as to mesh with each upper gear 514 and concentrically fixed to each rotating shaft 516. It is equipped with a lower gear 517.

As shown in FIG. 6A, each upper blade member 511 has a facing surface 511A which is horizontally opposed to each other and is arranged along the vertical direction in the closed state of the non-electric accessory 51. .. Further, as shown in FIG. 9, each upper blade member 511 is provided in a game area (front side of the game board 31).
Each upper blade member 511 is provided so as to have a width such that a plurality of game balls cannot pass through the passage 511B formed between the facing surfaces 511A at the same time. Further, the non-electric accessory 51 includes a baffle plate 51A provided above the entrance of the passage 511B. The distance between the upper end of each upper blade member 511 and the baffle plate 51A is narrower than that of one game ball. Therefore, the game ball cannot enter the non-electric accessory 51 through the entrance of the passage 511B in the closed state of the non-electric accessory 51.
The non-electric accessory 51 includes a cover 518 provided in the game area so as to cover each upper blade member 511 and the passage 511B.

As shown in FIG. 6A, each plate-shaped body 513 is arranged so as to have an obtuse angle with respect to the facing surface 511A of each upper blade member 511. Specifically, each plate-shaped body 513 is arranged to be inclined so as to approach the passage 511B from the upper end portion to the lower end portion on the rotation shaft 512 side in the closed state of the non-electric accessory 51. .. Here, as shown in FIG. 9, each plate-shaped body 513 is provided on the back side of the game board 31. Specifically, the non-electric accessory 51 includes a passage 51B that guides a game ball that has entered the non-electric accessory 51 through the entrance of the passage 511B to the back side of the game board 31, and each plate-shaped body 513 has a passage 51B. One end is fixed to each rotation shaft 512 so as to close the discharge port of the passage 51B.

As shown in FIG. 6A, each lower blade member 515 is arranged so as to have an obtuse angle with respect to the facing surface 511A of each upper blade member 511. Specifically, each lower blade member 515 is arranged so as to approach the passage 511B from the upper end portion to the lower end portion on the rotation shaft 516 side in the closed state of the non-electric accessory 51. .. Further, as shown in FIG. 9, each lower blade member 515 is provided on the back side of the game board 31. Specifically, each lower blade member 515 is provided at a passing position of the game ball guided to the non-electric accessory 51 via the connecting passage 535 of the crune 53. Here, one end of each lower blade member 515 is fixed to each rotation shaft 516 so as to close the discharge port 535A of the connecting passage 535.

In this way, the connecting passage 535 of the above-mentioned Kroon 53 communicates above each lower blade member 515.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 6A, the game balls that enter the hole 533A of the crune 53, fall downward, and are guided to the non-electric accessory 51 via the connecting passage 535, are each lower blade member. It falls towards 515. Then, as shown in FIG. 6B, the game ball that has fallen toward each lower blade member 515 rotates each lower blade member 515 around each rotation shaft 516, thereby causing each lower blade member 515. Spread so as to separate the lower end of the (see arrow A in the figure).
After expanding the lower end of each lower blade member 515 so as to be separated from each other, the game ball is discharged from the non-electric accessory 51 to the game area through the opening 312 through the discharge passage 51C.

Further, since each rotation shaft 516 and each lower gear 517 rotate with the rotation of each lower blade member 515, each upper gear 514 rotates with the rotation of each lower gear 517. Then, each upper blade member 511 and each plate-shaped body 513 rotate with the rotation of each upper gear 514 (see arrow B in the figure). As a result, the non-electric accessory 51 shifts from the closed state to the open state.

Here, the non-electric accessory 51 includes a non-electric accessory open detection sensor 519 (see FIG. 11) that detects the transition from the closed state to the open state. The non-electric accessory opening detection sensor 519 may be any one as long as it can detect the opening of the non-electric accessory 51, and for example, a contact type sensor or the like can be adopted. ..

As shown in FIG. 6B, the distance between the upper end of each upper blade member 511 and the baffle plate 51A is wider than that of one game ball in the open state of the non-electric accessory 51. Therefore, the game ball can enter the non-electric accessory 51 through the entrance of the passage 511B in the open state of the non-electric accessory 51.
Here, each plate-shaped body 513 rotates about each rotation shaft 512 so as to close the passage 51B in the open state of the non-electric accessory 51.

Therefore, the game ball that has entered the non-electric accessory 51 through the entrance of the passage 511B is guided to the back side of the game board 31 through the passage 51B, and then each plate-shaped body centered on each rotation shaft 512. By rotating the 513, the lower ends of each plate-shaped body 513 are pushed apart so as to be separated from each other.
After the lower end portions of the plate-shaped bodies 513 are pushed apart so as to be separated from each other, the game ball is discharged from the non-electric accessory 51 to the game area through the opening 312 through the discharge passage 51C.

Further, since each rotation shaft 512 and each upper gear 514 rotate with the rotation of each plate-shaped body 513, each lower gear 517 rotates with the rotation of each upper gear 514. Then, each lower blade member 515 rotates with the rotation of each lower gear 517. As a result, the non-electric accessory 51 shifts from the open state to the closed state.

The non-electric accessory 51 wins the transition to the open / close execution mode in the internal lottery, and when the transition to the open / close execution mode is entered, it is an opportunity to start the round game. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 wins the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in the internal lottery, and after the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, when the ball enters the non-electric accessory 51, the opening / closing door 38b Is set to the open state, and execution of a predetermined number of round games is started.

Here, the entry into the non-electric accessory 51 is determined by detecting whether or not the game ball has passed through the discharge passage 51C with the detection sensor 40f. In other words, in the open state of the non-electric accessory 51, the game ball entering the non-electric accessory 51 through the entrance of the passage 511B, and in the closed state of the non-electric accessory 51, via the connecting passage 535. The game ball guided by the non-electric accessory 51 is determined to be a ball entering the non-electric accessory 51.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 starts executing 16 round games when the ball enters the non-electric accessory 51, so that the non-electric accessory 51 has 16 rounds. The characters "16R", which means to start executing the game, are displayed (see FIG. 2).
In the following description, the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A that start the execution of the 16 round games are referred to as 16 round execution gates, and the holes 533B and 533C that start the execution of the 4 round games are 4 It is referred to as a round execution gate, and the 16-round execution gate and the 4-round execution gate are also collectively referred to as a round game execution gate.

Therefore, the non-electric accessory 51 has an open state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is allowed to enter and a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter, and the non-electric accessory 51 is triggered by the entry of the game ball. It functions as a reversing ball entry means that shifts from an open state to a closed state.
Then, the non-electric accessory 51 includes each plate-shaped body 513 (first receiving portion) that receives the game ball that has entered the non-electric accessory 51, and each lower blade member 515 that receives the game ball that has entered the hole 533A. (Second receiving portion) is provided, and by receiving the game ball at each plate-shaped body 513, the state shifts from the open state to the closed state, and by receiving the game ball at each lower blade member 515, the closed state. To the open state.

In the present embodiment, the reversing ball entering means shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball at the first receiving portion, and is closed by receiving the game ball at the second receiving portion. It was shifting from the state to the open state. On the other hand, the reverse ball entry means includes, for example, a drive unit that sets the reverse ball entry means to either a closed state or an open state, and a sensor that detects the entry of the game ball. When the ball entering is detected, the drive unit may shift the reversing ball entering means from the open state to the closed state. In short, the reversing ball entry means has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is entered and a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter, and is opened when the game ball enters. It suffices to shift from the state to the closed state.

Further, the crune 53 allows the game ball that has entered the croon 53 to enter the ball, and the holes 533B and 533C (first) that do not shift the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters. 533A (second ball), which allows the non-electric accessory 51 to move from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters the crune 53 and the game ball enters the ball. It is equipped with a ball entry section). The crune 53 has a rolling surface 531 for rolling a game ball that has entered the croon 53, and a first ball entry portion and a second entry portion are provided on the rolling surface 531 and roll. A game ball that rolls on the moving surface 531 is inserted.

In the present embodiment, the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section are provided on the rolling surface 531 of the crune 53, and a game ball that rolls on the rolling surface 531 is inserted. .. On the other hand, the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section distribute, for example, a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means into the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section. It may be provided in the mechanism. In this case, the probabilities of distributing the game ball to the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section by the distribution mechanism may be the same or different. In short, the variable ball entry means may include a first ball entry section and a second ball entry section.

Here, as described above, the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A are 16-round execution gates that start execution of 16 round games. Further, each of the holes 533B and 533C is a 4-round execution gate that starts execution of 4 round games. Therefore, the game in the open / close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A is higher than the game in the open / close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the holes 533B and 533C. It gives value to the player.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 sets the number of times of opening and closing of the variable winning device 38 to a predetermined number of times (4 times in the present embodiment) when the game ball enters each of the holes 533B and 533C. When the game in the open / close execution mode in which the game ball can be paid out is started and the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A, the variable winning device 38 is opened / closed more times than a predetermined number (in the present embodiment). By setting (16 times), a game in an open / close execution mode in which more game balls than a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out is started.

In the present embodiment, the opening / closing execution mode game that starts when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A is performed by setting the number of opening / closing times of the variable winning device 38, respectively, for the holes 533B and 533C. The player is given a higher value than the game in the open / close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the ball, but for example, by setting the opening time of the variable winning device 38, each hole 533B, 533C The player may be given a higher value than the game in the open / close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the ball. In short, the game of the open / close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the second ball entry portion and the reverse ball entry means is the open / close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the first ball entry portion. It suffices to give the player a higher value than the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the holes 533A are used as 16-round execution gates for starting the execution of 16 round games, and the holes 533B and 533C are used as 4-round execution gates for starting the execution of 4 round games. The correspondence between 533A to 533C and the 16-round execution gate and the 4-round execution gate was fixed. On the other hand, the correspondence between the holes 533A to 533C and the 16-round execution gate and the 4-round execution gate does not have to be fixed. For example, the correspondence is changed based on the result of the internal lottery. You may. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the game playability and can improve the player's attention to the game.

7 and 8 are enlarged views of the vicinity of the non-electric accessory. Specifically, FIGS. 7 (A) and 8 (A) are views showing a state in which the game ball has fallen toward the non-electric accessory 51 in the open state of the non-electric accessory 51. 7 (B) and FIG. 8 (B) are diagrams showing the subsequent flow of the game ball.
As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the non-electric accessory 51 includes a rotary distribution mechanism 51D provided on the upper left of the baffle plate 51A.
The rotary distribution mechanism 51D is formed on the rotary shaft 51D1 attached to the game board 31 so as to be rotatable around an axis orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 31, and on the rotary shaft 51D1 about the rotary shaft 51D1 at equal intervals. It is provided with three rotating blades 51D2 and a stopper 51D3 provided below the rotating shaft 51D1.

Of the three rotary blades 51D2, the upper rotary blade 51D2 is non-electric as it goes upward as shown in FIG. 7 (A) when the right rotary blade 51D2 is in contact with the stopper 51D3. It tilts so that it approaches the accessory 51.
In this state, the game ball that has fallen through the left side of the wind turbine located at the upper right of the rotary distribution mechanism 51D includes the upper rotary blade 51D2 and the left rotary blade 51D2 among the three rotary blades 51D2. It will fall between (see the arrow in FIG. 7 (A)).

As shown in FIG. 7B, the game ball that fell between the upper rotary blade 51D2 and the left rotary blade 51D2 rotated the rotary shaft 51D1 counterclockwise via the rotary blade 51D2. After that, the ball passes through the left side of the non-electric accessory 51 without entering the non-electric accessory 51 (see the arrow in FIG. 7B). Then, of the three rotary blades 51D2, the left rotary blade 51D2 is in contact with the stopper 51D3. As a result, the rotation shaft 51D1 stops its rotation. The game ball that has passed the left side of the non-electric accessory 51 will then enter the out port 39.

On the other hand, of the three rotary blades 51D2, the upper rotary blade 51D2 is upward as shown in FIG. 8 (A) when the left rotary blade 51D2 is in contact with the stopper 51D3. It tilts away from the non-electric accessory 51 as it goes toward it.
In this state, the game ball that has fallen through the left side of the wind turbine located at the upper right of the rotary distribution mechanism 51D includes the upper rotary blade 51D2 and the right rotary blade 51D2 among the three rotary blades 51D2. It will fall between (see the arrow in FIG. 8 (A)).

As shown in FIG. 8B, the game ball that has fallen between the upper rotary blade 51D2 and the right rotary blade 51D2 rotates the rotary shaft 51D1 clockwise via the rotary blade 51D2. , The ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 (see the arrow in FIG. 8B). Then, of the three rotary blades 51D2, the right rotary blade 51D2 is in contact with the stopper 51D3. As a result, the rotation shaft 51D1 stops its rotation.

In this way, the rotary distribution mechanism 51D distributes the game ball that has fallen toward the non-electric accessory 51 to the left and right according to its own rotation, and has a left route that prevents the game ball from entering the non-electric accessory 51. , Has a function of alternately switching between the right route for inserting the game ball into the non-electric accessory 51.
Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball that has fallen toward the non-electric accessory 51 against the player's intention to enter the non-electric accessory 51, and to make it easier to reflect the player's intention. Can be done.

In the present embodiment, the rotary distribution mechanism 51D is provided only in the first stage, but the second stage rotary distribution mechanism 51D may be provided, and the third and subsequent stages of the rotary distribution mechanism 51D may be further provided. You may. According to this, it is possible to make it more difficult for the game ball that has fallen toward the non-electric accessory 51 against the player's intention to enter the non-electric accessory 51, further making the player's intention further. It can be easily reflected.
Further, in the present embodiment, the rotary distribution mechanism 51D distributes the game ball that has fallen toward the non-electric accessory 51 to the left and right according to its own rotation, but the game ball is distributed by using a method other than rotation. May be sorted.

FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device.
As shown in FIG. 10, the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is divided into three rows of display areas, and the left symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the right symbol are in each display area in this order from the left. Column Z3 is displayed. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, eight types of symbols consisting of numbers "1" to "8" are arranged in ascending order from the bottom to the top, and "1" is next to "8". It is composed of. In FIG. 10, the center line of each display area is indicated by a alternate long and short dash line.

The symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment) based on the winning of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. By starting the variable display of the symbol, the effect for the game round is executed on the display screen G. The effect for this game round is switched from the variable display to the stop display in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L. It ends in the state.
That is, the game times are from the start of the variable display on the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47 to the display of a predetermined stop result based on the winning of each of the operating ports 36 and 37.

The mode of variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 47 is not limited to this, and is arbitrary. For example, the number of columns of the symbol string, the scroll direction of each symbol string, the number of symbols of each symbol string, and the like can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbol of each symbol string may be a mode in which a picture and a number are combined, or may be a mode of only a picture, instead of the mode of only numbers.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 11, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a voice emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a payout control device 70 that executes payout control that causes the above-mentioned payout device 71 to pay out the game balls, and a power supply that executes launch control that causes the above-mentioned game ball launch mechanism 81 to launch the game balls. A launch control device 80 is provided, and these devices are mounted on a back pack unit.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control (main control) of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. The main control device 60 includes a board box for accommodating the main control board 61 and the like. The substrate box may be provided with a trace means that leaves a trace when the substrate box is opened, or may be provided with a trace structure that leaves a trace when the substrate box is opened. Specifically, as a trace means, a substrate box is formed by connecting a plurality of case bodies, and a connecting portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined portion when separating each case body is provided or peeled off. At this time, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of peeling due to the adhesive layer remaining on the bonding target is attached so as to straddle the boundary between the plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between these case bodies can be adopted.

The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61, and a ROM 63 and a RAM 64 constituting the MPU 62. Here, the MPU 62 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, and the like are combined into a chip in addition to the ROM 63 and the RAM 64.
In the present embodiment, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 62, but they may be individually chipped. This also applies to MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 60.

The ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply for holding the stored information. The ROM 63 has various areas such as a pass / fail table storage area 63a, a distribution table storage area 63b, and a reach table storage area 63c. These areas will be described in detail later.
The RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a control program stored in the ROM 63, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply for holding the stored information. Is. The RAM 64 has various areas such as various counter areas 64a, a holding ball storage area 64b, and an electric service holding area 64c. These areas will be described in detail later.

The MPU 62 includes an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 62 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 65 provided in the main control device 60, a plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40k, and a non-electric accessory open detection sensor 519. The output port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, the payout control device 70, and the voice emission control device 90. Further, the output port of the MPU 62 includes an electric accessory drive unit 37b for opening and closing the electric accessory 37a of the lower operating port 37, a variable winning drive unit 38c for opening and closing the opening / closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38, and a blade member. The blade member drive unit 521c that opens and closes the 521a, the plate drive unit 523c that opens and closes the plate 523a, the main display unit 45, and the accessory display unit 46 are connected to each other.

The main control board 61 has a driver circuit. The MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric service open state, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b to open and close the electric accessory drive 37a. Further, in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 38c to open / close the large winning opening 38a. Further, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the blade member driving unit 521c to open and close the blade member 521a. Further, in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the plate drive unit 523c to open / close the plate 523a. Further, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the main display unit 45 and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the respective operating ports 36 and 37. Further, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the accessory display unit 46 and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41.

The power failure monitoring board 65 relays between the main control board 61 and the power supply / launch control device 80 having a function of supplying operating power, and monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts output from the power supply / launch control device 80. .. Therefore, the MPU 62 receives power via the power failure monitoring board 65.
The detection sensors 40a to 40k include various winning openings of the general winning opening 35, the upper operating opening 36, the lower operating opening 37, and the variable winning device 38, the out opening 39, each through gate 41, and the right variable entry mechanism 52. Also, they are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with each of the holes 533A to 533C of the crune 53. Based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40a to 40k, the MPU 62 wins prizes in various winning openings, out openings 39, through gates 41, right variable entry mechanism 52, and croon 53 holes 533A to 533C. Judgment (ball entry judgment) is being made. The MPU 62 executes an internal lottery based on the winning determination of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37.

The payout control device 70 executes payout control for causing the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls and rental balls (game balls to be lent to the player during a game) based on a command (control command) transmitted from the main control device 60. To do.

The power supply / launch control device 80 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a playground or the like. Then, the power supply / emission control device 80 generates the operating power required for each of the main control board 61, the payout control device 70, and the like based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, and the generated operation. Supply power. The power supply / emission control device 80 includes a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor. The power supply unit for power failure supplies power for storage and holding to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

Further, the power supply / launch control device 80 executes launch control for launching the game ball to the game ball launch mechanism 81. Here, the game ball launch mechanism 81 includes a launch rail extending toward the guide rail 34 of the game board 31, a ball feeding device that supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 25a onto the launch rail, and a launch rail. It is provided with a solenoid, which is an electric actuator that launches the game ball supplied to the guide rail 34 toward the guide rail 34. When the predetermined firing conditions are satisfied, the power supply / firing control device 80 supplies a drive signal (launch permission signal) to the solenoid to launch the game ball.

<Electrical configuration for executing an internal lottery in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60>
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the contents of each counter used in the internal lottery.
As shown in FIG. 12, the MPU 62 executes an internal lottery or the like by using the values (information) of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4. Specifically, the MPU 62 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 for the lottery for generating jackpots, and uses the jackpot type counter C2 for the lottery for the jackpot type when a jackpot occurs, and draws whether or not to generate reach display. The reach random number counter C3 is used for. Further, the MPU 62 uses the random number initial value counter CINI for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and uses the variable type counter CS for determining the display duration in the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47. Further, the MPU 62 uses the electric accessory opening counter C4 for a lottery as to whether or not the electric accessory 37a of the lower operating port 37 is set to the electric service open state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 64a (see FIG. 11) of the RAM 64.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, the counter returns to 0. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. Among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b (see FIG. 11) provided as the acquisition information storage means. Further, among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 is stored in the electric service holding area 64c (see FIG. 11) of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in each through gate 41. Will be done.

The holding ball storage area 64b includes a holding area Ra for the first result display unit, a holding area Rb for the second result display unit, and an execution area AE.

The first result display unit holding area Ra provided as the first acquired information storage means includes four storage areas of the first area Ra1 to the fourth area Ra4. Each area Ra1 to Ra4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 uses the set of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as hold information in time series in each area Ra1 to Ra4 according to the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 36. Store it. Specifically, the MPU 62 holds the hold information in the order of the first area Ra1 → the second area Ra2 → the third area Ra3 → the fourth area Ra4 when the winning of the upper operating port 36 occurs a plurality of times in succession. Store in chronological order.

As described above, since the holding area Ra for the first result display unit includes four storage areas, up to four winning balls for the upper operating port 36 are held. Further, the hold area Ra for the first result display unit includes a storage area for writing the number of holds stored in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4.
The number of holdings related to the upper operating port 36 is not limited to 4, but may be any other, such as 2, 3, or 5 or more, and may be a single number. You may.

The second result display unit holding area Rb provided as the second acquired information storage means includes four storage areas of the first area Rb1 to the fourth area Rb4. Each area Rb1 to Rb4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 uses the set of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as hold information in time series in each area Rb1 to Rb4 according to the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 37. Store it. Specifically, the MPU 62 holds the hold information in the order of the first area Rb1 → the second area Rb2 → the third area Rb3 → the fourth area Rb4 when the lower operating port 37 is awarded a prize a plurality of times in succession. Store in chronological order.

As described above, since the holding area Rb for the second result display unit includes four storage areas, up to four winning balls for the lower operating port 37 are held. Further, the hold area Rb for the second result display unit includes a storage area for writing the number of holds stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4.
The number of holdings related to the lower operating port 37 is not limited to 4, but may be arbitrary, may be 2, 3, or 5 or more, and may be a single number. You may.

When the execution area AE starts the variable display of the result display units 45a and 45b, the execution area AE stores the hold information stored in the storage area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit or the hold area Rb for the second result display unit. It is an area for moving.

The electric service holding area 64c includes four storage areas like the holding area Ra for the first result display unit and the holding area Rb for the second result display unit. Therefore, up to four winning balls for each through gate 41 are reserved.
The number of reserved pieces related to each through gate 41 is not limited to 4, but may be arbitrary, may be 2, 3, or 5 or more, and may be a single number. You may.

<Detailed explanation of each counter>
The details of each counter will be described below.
First, the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 becomes a loop counter that loops in the range of 0 to 250 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value of 250, and then returning to 0. ing.
The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the electric service holding area 64c of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins in each through gate 41. To.
Then, the MPU 62 draws a lottery (electric combination) as to whether or not the electric accessory 37a of the lower operating port 37 is set to the electric service open state based on the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 64c. Execute the open lottery).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of support modes in which the frequency of winning a game ball into the lower operating port 37 is different from each other by setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a low frequency support mode (low frequency guide state) in which the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state is relatively low, and a frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state. It has a relatively high frequency support mode (high frequency guide state).

In the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open state is the same (for example, both are 4/5) in the electric accessory open lottery. However, in the high-frequency support mode, as compared with the low-frequency support mode, when the electric accessory 37a is won in the open state, the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state more often, and the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state. The opening time for one time is also longer. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the closing time for setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state during each opening in the one-time electric service open state is shorter than the one-time opening time. Furthermore, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode has a minimum secured time (role) that is secured as the minimum waiting time from the end of the electric accessory opening lottery to the next electric accessory opening lottery. The duration of one variable display on the physical display unit 46) is shortened.

Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the game ball is more likely to win a prize in the lower operating port 37 as compared with the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning the upper operating port 36 than the lower operating opening 37. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning the lower operating port 37 than the upper operating port 36.
Then, when a prize is detected in the lower operating port 37, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of game balls so much. It can be carried out.

The configuration of the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode is not limited to this. For example, the high-frequency support mode may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery as compared with the low-frequency support mode. Further, for example, a plurality of types of reservation times may be prepared, and the high-frequency support mode may be configured so that a shorter reservation time can be easily selected as compared with the low-frequency support mode, and the average of the selection time is selected. May be configured to be shorter. Further, by combining the conditions of the number of times the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the opening time, and the securing time, the high frequency support mode sets the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state to the low frequency support mode. It may be configured to be relatively high as compared with.

Next, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value of 599, and then returning to 0. .. Further, the jackpot random number counter C1 reads the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time as an initial value every time it loops once. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599, like the jackpot random number counter C1.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is set in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. Stored in. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 36, and the game ball wins in the lower operating port 37. It is stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery for generating a big hit (win / fail lottery) based on the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a winning / failing table in which the values of random numbers that win the jackpot occurrence are stored.
Among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 It is stored as (win / fail information group).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has two winning / losing lottery modes: a low-probability mode (low-probability state) in which it is difficult to win a big hit, and a high-probability mode (high-probability state) in which a big hit is easy to win. .. The pass / fail tables are the pass / fail table for the low probability mode (low probability pass / fail information group) shown in FIG. 13 (a) and the pass / fail table for the high probability mode (high probability pass / fail information) shown in FIG. 13 (b). Group) and.
The MPU 62 executes a lottery for generating a jackpot by comparing these hit / fail tables with the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

These winning / failing tables have the results (winning / failing results) of a plurality of jackpot occurrences of "big hit winning", "special losing result", and "normal losing result".
Specifically, under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of a big hit, as shown in FIG. 13A, the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit winning" is two. Is.
On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of a big hit, as shown in FIG. Is. Here, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot winning that is stored in the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is included in the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit winning" stored in the winning / failing table for the high probability mode.

The value and number of random numbers stored in each winning / failing table are arbitrary, and the high-probability mode may have a higher probability of winning a big hit than the low-probability mode. In addition, the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit" stored in the winning / failing table for the high probability mode does not include the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit winning" stored in the winning / failing table for the low probability mode. It may also include a part of the random number values that are stored in the winning / failing table for the low probability mode and become the "big hit winning".

In addition, in each winning / losing lottery mode, except for the value of the random number that is the "big hit winning", the big hit is not won and the result is lost.
Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of deviation results, a "special deviation result (small hit result)" and a "normal deviation result". All of these out-of-order results are common in that they do not trigger a transition to the win / fail lottery mode or the support mode. However, the "special deviation result" is different in that it does not trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode, whereas the "normal deviation result" does not trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode.

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 29 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value of 29, and then returning to 0. ..
The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is set in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. Stored in. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 36, and the game ball wins in the lower operating port 37. It is stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (sorting lottery) of the jackpot type when a jackpot occurs, based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a distribution table in which the values of random numbers related to the distribution destinations of the jackpot types are stored.
As shown in FIG. 14, the value of the random number related to the distribution destination of the jackpot type is stored in the distribution table storage area 63b (see FIG. 11) of the ROM 63 provided as the distribution information group storage means. It is stored as a minute information group). The distribution table includes a first distribution table (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 14 (a) and a second distribution table (second distribution information group) shown in FIG. 14 (b). ing.
The MPU 62 executes a lottery of the jackpot type by comparing these distribution tables with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

The first distribution table is based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the hold area Ra for the first result display unit to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning of the upper operating port 36. This is a table that is referred to when a lottery of the type of jackpot is performed.
As shown in FIG. 14A, the first distribution table includes "low probability result (special distribution result corresponding to low probability)" and "unspecified small round high probability result (latent high probability result corresponding to small round)". ) ”,“ Explicit small round high probability result (high probability result corresponding to small round) ”, and“ most advantageous result (special distribution result corresponding to high probability) ”are set as the distribution destinations. Specifically, in the first distribution table, among the values "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" are distributed to "low probability results", and "10 to 14" are "unspecified". "Round high accuracy result" is assigned, "15-19" is assigned to "explicit small round high accuracy result", and "20 to 29" is assigned to "most advantageous result".

The second distribution table is based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the holding area Rb for the second result display unit to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning of the lower operating port 37. This is a table that is referred to when a lottery of a jackpot type is performed.
As shown in FIG. 14B, the second distribution table has two distribution results, a “low probability result” and a “most advantageous result”, as distribution destinations. Specifically, in the second distribution table, among the values "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" are distributed to "low probability results", and "10 to 29" are "most advantageous results". ".

Each distribution result has a difference in at least one of the following conditions (1) to (3).
(1) Win / fail lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode (2) Support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode (3) Mode of open / close control of the variable winning device 38 in the open / close execution mode

First, the difference in the winning / failing lottery mode of (1) will be described.
The "low probability result" is a distribution result in which the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the low probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode ends. This low-probability mode continues until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning or losing lottery.
The "unspecified small round high probability result", "explicit small round high probability result", and "most advantageous result" have a high probability of winning / failing lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode ends. This is the distribution result set in the mode. This high-probability mode continues until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning or losing lottery.

Next, the difference in the support mode of (2) will be described.
The “low probability result” is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode regardless of the support mode before the end of the open / close execution mode. This high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of game rounds reaches the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times).

The “unspecified small round high accuracy result” is a distribution result in which the support mode before the end of the open / close execution mode is maintained as it is. Here, if the support mode before the end of the open / close execution mode is the high-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode continues until at least a "big hit win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.
The "explicit small round high accuracy result" and the "most advantageous result" are distribution results in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode regardless of the support mode before the end of the open / close execution mode. This high-frequency support mode continues until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning / losing lottery.

The difference in the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 38 in the opening / closing execution mode of (3) will be described in detail later.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 238 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value of 238, and then returning to 0. ..
The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is set in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. Stored in. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 36, and the game ball wins in the lower operating port 37. It is stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (reach generation lottery) as to whether or not to generate the reach display based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

The reach display is an expected effect that occurs when the result is a "normal loss result" without being a "big hit win" in the win / loss lottery.
Specifically, the MPU 62 is the value of the reach table and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b when the result is a "normal loss result" without being a "big hit" in the winning / losing lottery. By comparing with and, a lottery for whether or not to generate the reach display is executed, and when the reach display is generated in this lottery, the reach display is generated. The reach table is a table that stores the value of a random number related to the occurrence of the reach display, and is stored in the reach table storage area 63c (see FIG. 11) of the ROM 63.

Here, when the winning / failing lottery results in a "big hit" and the distribution lottery is assigned to the "most advantageous result", the symbol display device 47 stops the same odd number or the same even number as the stop result. The combination of symbols having the number of is stopped and displayed on the effective line L. In addition, when the result is a "big hit" in the winning / failing lottery and the result is sorted into a "low probability result" in the sorting lottery, the symbol display device 47 is a combination of symbols having the same even number as a stop result. Is stopped and displayed on the effective line L. Furthermore, if it becomes a "big hit win" in the winning / failing lottery and is divided into "unspecified small round high probability result" or "explicit small round high probability result" in the distribution lottery, or "big hit winning" in the winning / failing lottery. If the result is a "special loss result", the symbol display device 47 is selected when the stop result is not a combination of symbols having the same number but a "normal loss result" in the winning / failing lottery. A combination of special symbols having different numbers that are not displayed is stopped and displayed on the effective line L.

The reach display is when the combination of symbols having the same number is finally stopped and displayed (it becomes a "big hit win" in the winning / failing lottery, and it is sorted into the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result" in the distribution lottery. In the case of), it occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, the reach display is when the combination of special symbols is finally stopped and displayed (“big hit winning” in the winning / failing lottery, and “unspecified small round high probability result” or “explicit small round high” in the distribution lottery. It does not occur regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the case of being sorted into the "probable result" or the case of "special loss result" without being "big hit winning" in the winning / losing lottery.

In the reach display mode, a part of the symbol rows (for example, the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3) among the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is placed on the effective line L. By displaying the stop, the same combination of symbols is displayed to suggest the stop result, and the remaining symbol sequence (for example, symbol sequence Z2) is displayed in a variable manner in that state.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit winner" in the winning / losing lottery after the variable display is started on the symbol display device 47 by generating the reach display and before displaying the predetermined stop result. It is possible to make the player expect that the result is divided into "low probability result" or "most advantageous result" in the distribution lottery.

The reach display mode is not limited to this, and after stopping and displaying a part of the symbol strings, the remaining symbol strings are displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image in the background. Alternatively, each symbol string may be reduced or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like may be displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen G.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has an expected effect as a kind of variable display of the symbol display device 47. The expected effect is to make the player expect that the winning / failing lottery will be a "big hit" after the variable display is started on the symbol display device 47 and before the predetermined stop result is displayed. Refers to the production. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of expected effects, the reach display and the notice display described above.

The notice display will not be a "big hit win" in the win / loss lottery if it becomes a "big hit win" in the win / loss lottery, or if it becomes a "special loss result" without becoming a "big hit win" in the win / loss lottery. This is an expected production that makes it easier to generate the production than when the result is "normally out of order". This notice display may make it easier to select an effect having a low appearance rate, or may combine these, instead of making it easier to generate the effect.
The lottery for whether or not to generate the reach display was executed by the main control device 60, whereas the lottery for whether or not to generate the notice display is executed by the voice emission control device 90. ..

In the mode of the notice display, among the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variablely displayed, and a part of the symbol rows (for example, In a situation where the symbol sequence Z1) is stopped and displayed on the effective line L and a plurality of symbol sequences (for example, the symbol columns Z2 and Z3) are displayed in a variable manner or a reach display is generated, a predetermined character is displayed. Etc. are displayed on the display screen G as a moving image. This notice display occurs in both the case where the reach display is generated and the case where the reach display is not generated, but it is set so that it is more likely to occur when the reach display is generated than when the reach display is not generated. Has been done.
The notice display is not limited to this, and for example, the background may be changed and the notice display may be displayed by changing the form of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

Finally, the variable type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 198 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value of 198, and then returning to 0. ..
The variation type counter CS is updated at least once for each execution of the normal processing described later, and is stored in the lottery counter buffer each time the update is performed.
Then, the MPU 62 determines the display duration of the symbol on the main display unit 45 and the display duration of the symbol on the symbol display device 47 based on the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer. The display durations will be described in detail later.

<About various processes executed by the main controller 60>
The MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing for advancing the game, and main processing that is activated when the power is turned on. Hereinafter, timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing will be described in order.
The MPU 62 executes timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing, as well as NMI interrupt processing that is activated by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but the description of this processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing.
In the timer interrupt process, the MPU 62 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) executes steps S101 to S106, as shown in FIG.

In step S101, the MPU 62 executes a reading process for the plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40k. In this reading process, the MPU 62 reads the states of the plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40k, determines the states, and stores them in the RAM 64 as winning detection information. When the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensors 40a to 40d corresponding to the various winning openings have detected the winning of the game ball, the MPU 62 sets a prize ball command for instructing the payout of the prize ball, and this setting is made. The command is transmitted to the payout control device 70. For example, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 40d corresponding to the variable winning device 38 has detected the winning of a game ball, the MPU 62 is a prize ball command for instructing 15 prize balls, which is a specific unit number. Is transmitted to the payout control device 70.
The payout control device 70 performs payout control for causing the payout device 71 to pay out the prize balls based on the prize ball command transmitted from the MPU 62.

Further, in step S101, the MPU 62 executes a reading process of the non-electric accessory release detection sensor 519. In this reading process, the MPU 62 reads the state of the non-electric accessory release detection sensor 519, determines the state, and stores it in the RAM 64 as the non-electric accessory release information. When the MPU 62 determines that the non-electric accessory opening detection sensor 519 has detected the opening of the non-electric accessory 51, the MPU 62 executes a predetermined process. This predetermined process will be described in detail later.

In step S102, the MPU 62 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 updates the random number initial value counter CINI by adding 1 to the previous value, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 64. To do. If the MPU 62 reaches the maximum value when 1 is added to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI is returned to 0 and cleared.

In step S103, the MPU 62 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 is updated by adding 1 to the previous values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4, respectively. The latter value is stored in the lottery counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 64. If the MPU 62 reaches the maximum value when 1 is added to the previous values of the counters C1 to C4, the values of the counters C1 to C4 are returned to 0 and cleared.

In step S104, the MPU 62 executes a winning process for thru. In this through winning process, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 40 g corresponding to each through gate 41 has detected the winning of the game ball, the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in step S103. The value of is stored in the electric service holding area 64c. Further, the MPU 62 sets a command for lighting the third hold lamp unit 49c, and transmits the set command to the voice emission control device 90.
The voice emission control device 90 turns on the third hold lamp unit 49c based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62. Further, as described above, the maximum number of reserved game balls that have won the through gate 41 is four, and the third reserved lamp unit 49c is lit by the number corresponding to the reserved number.

In step S105, the MPU 62 executes the ball entry process for the round game execution gate.
Hereinafter, the ball entry process for the round game execution gate will be described in detail.

<Ball entry process for round game execution gate>
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the ball entry process for the round game execution gate.
In the ball entry process for the round game execution gate, the MPU 62 executes steps S201 to S204 as shown in FIG.

In step S201, the MPU 62 executes 16 rounds by determining whether or not the detection sensors 40f and 40i corresponding to the 16 round execution gate (non-electric accessory 51 and hole 533A) have detected the entry of the game ball. It is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the gate.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has entered the 16-round execution gate, the MPU 62 sets the 16-round execution flag in the RAM 64 in step S202. This 16-round execution flag is a flag for identifying that a ball has entered the 16-round execution gate. After that, the MPU 62 ends the ball entry process for the round game execution gate.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not entered the 16-round execution gate, the MPU 62 corresponds to the 4-round execution gate (hole 533B and hole 533C) in step S203. By determining whether or not the detection sensors 40j and 40k have detected the entry of the game ball, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the 4-round execution gate.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S203 that the game ball has entered the 4-round execution gate, the MPU 62 sets the 4-round execution flag in the RAM 64 in step S204. This 4-round execution flag is a flag for identifying that a ball has entered the 4-round execution gate. After that, the MPU 62 ends the ball entry process for the round game execution gate.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S203 that the game ball has not entered the 4-round execution gate, the MPU 62 enters the round game execution gate without executing the processes after step S204. End the sphere processing.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt processing, the processing after step S106 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S106, the MPU 62 executes a winning process for the operating port.
Hereinafter, the winning process for the operating port will be described in detail.

<Prize processing for operating port>
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a winning process for the operating port.
In the winning process for the actuation port, the MPU 62 executes steps S301 to S307 as shown in FIG.

In step S301, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the detection sensor 40b corresponding to the upper operating port 36 has detected the winning of the game ball, thereby determining whether or not the game ball has won the upper operating opening 36 (starting winning). Is determined. When the MPU 62 determines in step S301 that the game ball has won a prize in the upper operating port 36, in step S302, the MPU 62 grasps the number of holdings stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit, and holds the holding. The number is set as the first start hold storage number RaN in a predetermined storage area in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit. After that, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S305.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S301 that the game ball has not won the upper operating port 36, in step S303, the detection sensor 40c corresponding to the lower operating port 37 wins the game ball. By determining whether or not is detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the lower operating port 37.
When it is determined in step S303 that the game ball has not won a prize in the lower operating port 37, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the operating port. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S303 that the game ball has won a prize in the lower operating port 37, in step S304, the MPU 62 grasps the number of holdings stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit. The reserved number is set as the second start reserved storage number RbN in a predetermined storage area in the reserved area Rb for the second result display unit. After that, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S305.

After executing the process of step S302 or step S304, in step S305, the start hold storage number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S302 or step S304 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). Determine if it exists.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S305 that the start hold storage number N is not less than the upper limit value, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the operating port. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S305 that the start hold storage number N is less than the upper limit value, the MPU 62 updates by adding 1 to the value of the start hold storage number N in step S306.

In step S307, the MPU 62 sets each value set of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process in the free storage area of the hold area for the result display unit. It is stored as hold information in the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the start hold storage number N updated in step S306.

For example, when the first start hold storage number RaN is set in step S302, the MPU 62 has each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt processing. The set of values is stored as hold information in the first storage area of the free storage area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start hold storage number RaN updated in step S306. For example, when the first start hold storage number RaN is set to "3" in step S302, the MPU 62 is in the storage area corresponding to "4" of the first start hold storage number RaN updated in step S306. Hold information is stored in a certain fourth area Ra4.

Further, for example, when the second start hold storage number RbN is set in step S304, the MPU 62 has the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt processing. The set of each value of is stored as hold information in the first storage area of the free storage area of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start hold storage number RbN updated in step S306. To do. For example, when the second start hold storage number RbN is set to "3" in step S304, the MPU 62 is in the storage area corresponding to "4" of the second start hold storage number RbN updated in step S306. Hold information is stored in a certain fourth area Rb4.

Further, in step S307, the MPU 62 sets a command for lighting the first hold lamp unit 49a or the second hold lamp unit 49b, and transmits this set command to the voice emission control device 90. After that, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the operating port.
The voice emission control device 90 turns on the first hold lamp unit 49a or the second hold lamp unit 49b based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62. Further, as described above, the maximum number of game balls that have won a prize in the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37 is four, and the first holding lamp portion 49a or the second holding lamp portion 49b is the holding number. And the corresponding number of lights.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing.
The MPU 62 executes a main process, which will be described later, which is activated when the power is turned on, and then executes a normal process, which is a main process for advancing the game. In this normal process, the MPU 62 executes steps S401 to S414 as shown in FIG. Specifically, the MPU 62 periodically executes steps S401 to S409 in a cycle of 4 msec, repeatedly executes steps S408 to S411 when the remaining time occurs, and steps S412 and subsequent steps according to the determination result of step S408. Execute.

In step S401, the MPU 62 executes an external output process for transmitting the timer interrupt process or the command set in the previous normal process to each control device on the sub side. In this external output processing, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the prize ball command is set, and if it determines that the prize ball command is set, the MPU 62 issues the prize ball command to the payout control device 70. Send. Further, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a command for the effect such as a command corresponding to the effect for the game round or a command corresponding to the effect for the open / close execution mode is set, and the command for the effect is set. If it is determined that the setting is made, a command for the effect is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90.

In step S402, the MPU 62 updates the variation type counter CS. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 updates the variable type counter CS by adding 1 to the previous value, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 64. .. If the MPU 62 reaches the maximum value when 1 is added to the previous value of the variation type counter CS, the value of the variation type counter CS is returned to 0 to clear the value.

In step S403, the MPU 62 executes a game turn control process for advancing the game turn. In the game time control process, the MPU 62 executes a winning / failing lottery and a sorting lottery, determines information related to a pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 47, and finally stops and displays the pattern on the main display unit 45. Execute the determination of information related to.
In step S404, the MPU 62 executes a game state transition process for shifting the game state. In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 executes a transition process to each game state such as an open / close execution mode, a high probability mode, and a high frequency support mode.
The game turn control process in step S403 and the game state transition process in step S404 will be described in detail later.

In step S405, the MPU 62 executes the demo display execution determination process. In this demo display execution determination process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a predetermined start waiting period for the start of the demo (for example, 30 sec) has elapsed without starting a new game after the end of the game. If it is determined that the start waiting period has elapsed, a demo command for starting the demo display is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90.
The voice emission control device 90 starts the demo display execution process based on the demo command transmitted from the MPU 62.

Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the start waiting period has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S405 is executed. For example, when the start waiting period is 30 sec and the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S405 is 4 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of times the process of step S405 is executed and reaches 7500 times, the start waiting period. Is determined to have passed. The configuration for measuring the start waiting period is arbitrary, and for example, the start waiting period may be measured using a real-time clock. Further, if the MPU 62 starts a new game round while counting the number of times the process of step S405 is executed, the MPU 62 resets the value of the count.

In step S406, the MPU 62 executes an electric service support process for executing drive control of the electric accessory 37a provided in the lower operating port 37. In this electric service support process, the MPU 62 executes the electric accessory opening lottery based on the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 64c of the RAM 64, and also performs the electric accessory opening lottery. If it is won, the opening / closing process of the electric accessory 37a is executed. Further, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the accessory display unit 46 so as to display the result of the electric accessory opening lottery.

In step S407, the MPU 62 executes the game ball launch control process. In this game ball launch control process, the MPU 62 causes the power supply / launch control device 80 to execute launch control for launching the game ball based on the player rotating the launch handle 27. Specifically, the power supply / launch control device 80 causes the game ball launch mechanism 81 to launch the game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 81 in a predetermined cycle (0.6 sec in the present embodiment). .. The solenoid is excited to launch the game ball with a firing intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation of the firing handle 27. Further, the power supply / launch control device 80 supplies a drive signal to the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 81 to launch the game ball when the predetermined launch conditions are satisfied.

In step S408, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area (not shown) of the RAM 64. This power failure flag is set in the RAM 64 by inputting a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring board 65 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 62. When the power failure monitoring board 65 confirms the occurrence of a power failure, the power failure monitoring board 65 outputs this power failure signal. The power failure flag is cleared when the next main process is executed.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 sets various flags by substituting 1 into a predetermined area such as the RAM 64, and clears various flags by substituting 0. For example, the pachinko machine 10 sets the power failure flag by substituting 1 for the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64, and clears the power failure flag by substituting 0 for the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag is set in step S408, the MPU 62 executes the power failure processing after step S412 without executing the processing after step S409. Specifically, in step S412, the MPU 62 prohibits the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In step S413, the MPU 62 calculates and stores the RAM determination value (checksum of the RAM 64). In step S414, the MPU 62 prohibits access to the RAM 64. After that, the MPU 62 continues an infinite loop until the power supply is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S408 that the power failure flag is not set, whether or not the timing for executing the next normal process is reached in step S409, that is, the current normal process is performed. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S409 that the timing for executing the next normal processing has not been reached, that is, when the remaining time occurs, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated in step S410, and step S411 is executed. In, the variation type counter CS is updated. The MPU 62 repeatedly executes steps S408 to S411 until it is determined in step S409 that the timing for executing the next normal process has been reached.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S409 that the timing for executing the next normal process has been reached, that is, when the remaining time has not occurred, the MPU 62 executes step S401 again to perform the next time. Start normal processing.

<Main processing>
FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main process.
In the main process, the MPU 62 executes steps S501 to S512, as shown in FIG.
In step S501, the MPU 62 executes a start-up process when the power is turned on. In this start-up process, the MPU 62 waits for the control board on the sub side (control board of the voice emission control device 90, etc.) to be in an operable state for a predetermined time (for example, about 500 msec) after the power is turned on. ) Elapses.

In step S502, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the permission prohibition period of 1 sec has elapsed. When the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that 1 sec has not elapsed, the MPU 62 repeatedly executes the process of step S502. Further, when it is determined in step S502 that 1 sec has elapsed, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S503.

Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not 1 sec has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S502 is executed. For example, when the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S502 is 0.1 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of times the process of step S502 is executed and determines that 1 sec has elapsed when it reaches 10,000 times. The configuration for measuring the permission / prohibition period is arbitrary, and for example, the permission / prohibition period may be measured using a real-time clock.

In step S503, the MPU 62 permits access to the RAM 64.
In step S504, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the RAM erase switch (not shown) provided in the power supply / emission control device 80 is turned on.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S504 that the RAM erase switch is turned on, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S509.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S504 that the RAM erase switch is not turned on, the MPU 62 determines in step S505 whether or not the power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64. To do.

Then, when the MPU 62 determines in step S505 that the power failure flag is not set, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S509.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S505 that the power failure flag is set, the MPU 62 calculates the RAM determination value in step S506.
In step S507, the MPU 62 confirms the validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 by determining whether or not the RAM determination value calculated in step S506 is normal. Specifically, the MPU 62 compares the RAM determination value calculated in step S506 with the RAM determination value saved in step S413 (processing at the time of power interruption) of normal processing, and if they match, , The RAM determination value is determined to be normal, and if they do not match, the RAM determination value is determined to be abnormal.

Then, when the MPU 62 determines in step S507 that the RAM determination value is not normal, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S509.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S507 that the RAM determination value is normal, the MPU 62 clears the power failure flag stored in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64 in step S508.

The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be determined by a method different from the method of confirming the consistency of the RAM determination value. For example, a keyword is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 in the power failure processing. The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be confirmed by writing and determining whether or not this keyword is normally written in the main process.

As described above, the MPU 62 determines that the RAM erase switch is turned on in step S504, determines that the power failure flag is not set in step S505, or the RAM determination value in step S507. If it is determined that is not normal, the processes after step S509 are executed.
Specifically, the MPU 62 clears the work area of the RAM 64 in step S509, and initializes the RAM 64 in step S510.

Therefore, for example, the manager of the game hall can initialize the data stored in the RAM 64 by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM erase switch at the start of business of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 initializes the data stored in the RAM 64 when the occurrence of the power failure is not confirmed on the power failure monitoring board 65 or when the RAM determination value is abnormal.

After executing the process of step S508 or step S510, the MPU 62 sends an initial command to the control board on the sub side (control board of the voice emission control device 90, etc.) in step S511, and in step S512, the timer interrupts. Allows the occurrence of processing and shifts to the above-mentioned normal processing.
By receiving the initial command transmitted in step S511, the control board on the sub side recognizes that communication with the main control board 61 is normally performed, and executes its own initialization. To do.

<Game times control processing>
FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game time control process.
In the game times control process, the MPU 62 executes steps S601 to S609 as shown in FIG.
In step S601, the MPU 62 determines whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode. When the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the open / close execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 ends the game times control process without executing the processes after step S602. Therefore, when it is determined that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 does not start the progress of the game round regardless of whether or not the winning of the game ball to each of the operating ports 36 and 37 is detected.
The MPU 62 determines whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode by referring to the open / close execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64. The same applies to each of the following processes. The MPU 62 sets the open / close execution mode flag at the time of transition to the open / close execution mode, and clears the open / close execution mode flag at the end of the open / close execution mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress, in step S602, whether or not the main display unit 45 is in the variable display, that is, the game is in progress. Judge whether or not.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S602 that the main display unit 45 is not in the variable display, the MPU 62 executes the game round start processing of steps S603 to S605.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S602 that the main display unit 45 is in the variable display, the MPU 62 executes the game round progress processing of steps S606 to S609.

First, the game round start processing of steps S603 to S605 will be described.
In step S603, the MPU 62 grasps the number of holdings stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit and the number of holdings stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit, and these holding numbers. It is determined whether or not the total number CRN of is "0" or less. When the MPU 62 determines in step S603 that the total number CRN is "0" or less, the MPU 62 ends the game times control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S603 that the total number CRN is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 holds the first result display unit holding area Ra or the second result display unit holding area Ra in step S604. The data setting process for setting the hold information stored in Rb for the digestion of the game times is executed. After that, in step S605, the MPU 62 executes the variation start process for causing the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47 to start the variation display to digest the game times, and ends the game times control process.
Hereinafter, the data setting process in step S604 and the fluctuation start process in step S605 will be described in detail.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a flowchart of data setting processing.
In the data setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S701 to S711 as shown in FIG.
In step S701, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit set in step S304 of the winning process for the operating port is "0" or less. To do. When the MPU 62 determines in step S701 that the second start hold storage number RbN is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the data setting process for the first result display unit of steps S702 to S706, and proceeds to step S701. When it is determined that the second start hold storage number RbN is not "0" or less, the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S707 to S711 is executed.

As described above, the data setting process includes the data setting process for the first result display unit, which sets the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit for digestion of the game times, and the second result display unit. It has a data setting process for a second result display unit that sets the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for digestion of game times.
Then, when the MPU 62 determines in step S701 that the second start hold storage number RbN is not "0" or less, the second result display unit does not execute the data setting process for the first result display unit. Execute the data setting process for. In other words, when the MPU 62 determines that there is hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit based on the winning of the game ball to the lower action port 37, the MPU 62 moves to the upper action port 36. Regardless of whether or not there is hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit based on the winning of the game ball, the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is given priority in the game. Set for multiple digestions.

First, the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S702 to S706 will be described.
In step S702, the MPU 62 is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the first start hold storage number RaN of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit.
In step S703, the MPU 62 moves the hold information stored in the first area Ra1 of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit to the execution area AE.
In step S704, the MPU 62 executes a data shift process for shifting the hold information stored in the storage area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the hold information stored in each area Ra1 to Ra4 to the first area Ra1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the hold information of the second area Ra2 to the first area Ra1, shifts the hold information of the third area Ra3 to the second area Ra2, and shifts the hold information of the fourth area Ra4 to the third area Ra4. Shift to area Ra3.

In step S705, the MPU 62 clears the second result display unit flag stored in the RAM 64. The second result display unit flag is a flag for specifying which of the first result display unit 45a and the second result display unit 45b, which of the main display unit 45, has started the variable display at the time of digesting the game times. Is. In this step S705, since the MPU 62 has cleared the second result display unit flag, the first result display unit 45a is variablely displayed based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 36 at the time of digesting the game times. Indicates to start.

In step S706, the MPU 62 sets a shift time command for recognizing that the shift of the hold information has been executed, transmits the set shift time command to the voice emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This shift command indicates that the shift of the hold information is executed for the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 36. It contains information for 90 to recognize.
The voice emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the first hold lamp unit 49a based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 reduces the number of lights of the first holding lamp unit 49a as the number of holdings of the game balls winning in the upper operating port 36 decreases.

Next, the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S707 to S711 will be described.
In step S707, the MPU 62 is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the second start hold storage number RbN of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit.
In step S708, the MPU 62 moves the hold information stored in the second area Rb1 of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit to the execution area AE.
In step S709, the MPU 62 executes a data shift process for shifting the hold information stored in the storage area of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the hold information stored in each area Rb1 to Rb4 to the first area Rb1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the hold information of the second area Rb2 to the first area Rb1, shifts the hold information of the third area Rb3 to the second area Rb2, and shifts the hold information of the fourth area Rb4 to the third area. Shift to area Rb3.

In step S710, the MPU 62 sets the second result display unit flag in the RAM 64. In this step S710, since the MPU 62 sets the second result display unit flag, the second result display unit 45b is variablely displayed based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 37 when the game round is digested. Indicates to start.

In step S711, the MPU 62 sets a shift time command for recognizing that the shift of the hold information has been executed, transmits the set shift time command to the voice emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This shift command indicates that the shift of the hold information is executed for the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 37. It contains information for 90 to recognize.
The voice emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the second hold lamp unit 49b based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 reduces the number of lights of the second holding lamp unit 49b as the number of holdings of the game balls winning in the lower operating port 37 decreases.

FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start process.
In the variation start process, the MPU 62 executes steps S801 to S818 as shown in FIG.
In step S801, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that the winning / failing lottery mode is not the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the winning / failing table for the low-probability mode (see FIG. 13A) from the winning / failing table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 in step S802. When it is read and the winning / failing lottery mode is determined to be the high probability mode in step S801, in step S803, the winning / failing table for the high probability mode (see FIG. 13B) is stored from the winning / failing table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. read out.

After executing the process of step S802 or step S803, the MPU 62 executes the pass / fail determination process in step S804. In this pass / fail determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE with the pass / fail table read in step S802 or step S803, thereby resulting in a win / fail lottery result (win / fail result). To judge. As described above, the winning / failing result is one of "big hit winning", "special losing result", and "normal losing result", and even if the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode, it is a high probability mode. The same is true.

In step S805, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning / failing result determined in step S804 is a “big hit winning”. When the MPU 62 determines in step S805 that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S806, and when it determines in step S805 that the winning / failing result is not "big hit winning". , Step S812 and subsequent processes are executed.

First, in step S805, a process (processing after step S806) when the winning / failing result is determined to be "big hit winning" by the MPU 62 will be described.
In step S806, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S806 that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 starts variable display on the first result display unit 45a based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 36. In step S807, the first distribution table (see FIG. 14A) is read from the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S806 that the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, the second result display unit 45b based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 37 In step S808, the second distribution table (see FIG. 14B) is read from the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

After executing the process of step S807 or step S808, the MPU 62 executes the distribution determination process in step S809. In this distribution determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE with the distribution table read in step S807 or step S808, thereby resulting in a distribution lottery result ( Sorting result) is judged.

In step S810, the MPU 62 executes a stop result setting process for the jackpot result. In the stop result setting process for the jackpot result, the MPU 62 determines in step S809 the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 45a or the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45. It is determined according to the distribution result, and the determined information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 has a pattern that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 by comparing the distribution result determined in step S809 with the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in the ROM 63 in advance. Determine relevant information. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, the mode of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 is defined differently for each distribution result.

In step S811, the MPU 62 sets a flag in the RAM 64 according to the distribution result determined in step S809. Specifically, when the MPU 62 identifies that the distribution result is a "low probability result", it sets a low probability result flag and specifies that it is an "unspecified low round high probability result". In that case, the implicit small round high probability result flag is set, and when it is specified that it is the "explicit small round high probability result", the explicit small round high probability result flag is set and the "most advantageous result" is set. If it is specified that is, the most advantageous result flag is set. After that, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S816.
In each of the following processes, the MPU 62 determines the distribution result by referring to these flags.

Next, in step S805, a process when the MPU 62 determines that the winning / failing result is not “big hit winning” (processing after step S812) will be described.
In step S812, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result determined in step S804 is a “special miss result”.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S812 that the pass / fail result is a "special miss result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S813, and determines in step S812 that the pass / fail result is not a "special miss result". Is the process from step S815 onward.

In step S813, the MPU 62 executes the stop result setting process for the special deviation result. In the stop result setting process for the special deviation result, the MPU 62 determines the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 45a or the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45, and the determination is made. The generated information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 determines the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 by referring to the stop result table for the special deviation result stored in the ROM 63 in advance. The mode of the pattern set in the stop result table for the special deviation result is different from the mode of the pattern set in the stop result table for the jackpot result.
In step S814, the MPU 62 sets the special disengagement flag in the RAM 64.
In each of the following processes, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is the "special miss result" by referring to the special miss flag.

On the other hand, in step S815, the MPU 62 normally executes the stop result setting process for the outlier result. In this stop result setting process for the normal deviation result, the MPU 62 determines the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 45a or the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45, and the determination is made. The generated information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 determines the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 by referring to the stop result table for the normal deviation result stored in advance in the ROM 63. The mode of the pattern set in the stop result table for the normal deviation result is different from the mode of the pattern set in the stop result table for the jackpot result and the stop result table for the special deviation result.

After executing any of the processes of step S811, step S814, and step S815, the MPU 62 executes the display duration (display duration) setting process in step S816.
In the display duration setting process, the MPU 62 acquires the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 64.

Further, in the display duration setting process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the reach display occurs on the symbol display device 47. Specifically, in the MPU 62, when the distribution result determined in step S809 is a "low probability result" or a "most advantageous result", and the pass / fail result determined in step S804 is a "normal deviation result". At the same time, if the reach generation lottery is won, it is determined that the reach display will occur. As described above, the MPU 62 compares the reach table stored in advance in the reach table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 with the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the hold ball storage area 64b. Execute a reach generation lottery.

When the MPU 62 determines that the reach display occurs, the variation type counter acquired from the variation type counter buffer by referring to the reach generation display duration table stored in the reach table storage area 63c of the ROM 63. The display duration corresponding to the value of CS is determined, and the determined display duration is set in the display duration counter provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 62 refers to the reach non-occurrence display duration table stored in the reach table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 for the variable type counter. The display duration corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS acquired from the buffer is determined, and the determined display duration is set in the display duration counter provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.

Specifically, the display duration table for non-reach generation is set so that the display duration becomes shorter as the number of held items increases. Therefore, the display duration when digesting the hold information related to the upper operating port 36 is set so as to become shorter as the number of holdings related to the upper operating port 36 increases. The display duration when the hold information related to the lower operating port 37 is digested is set so as to become shorter as the number of holdings related to the lower operating port 37 increases. In addition, the display duration table for non-reach is set so that when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the display duration is shorter than when the support mode is the low frequency support mode. In other words, if the number of holdings is the same, the display duration in the high frequency support mode is shorter than that in the low frequency support mode.
Further, the display duration determined by referring to the reach display duration table is different from the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-reach display duration table.

The display duration table for non-reach may be set in a relationship opposite to the above-mentioned relationship, such that the display duration becomes longer as the number of holds increases, depending on the number of holds and the support mode. It may be configured so as not to fluctuate. In addition, a display duration table may be set individually for each of the winning / failing result and the sorting result.

In step S817, the MPU 62 sets the variation command and the type command. The MPU 62 transmits the variation command and the type command set in step S817 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S401 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62. This process will be described in detail later.

The variable command contains information related to the display duration. In addition, the variable command does not include information on whether or not reach display occurs.
Here, as described above, the display duration determined by referring to the reach occurrence display duration table and the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-reach display duration table are mutually exclusive. It's different.
Therefore, even if the information on whether or not the reach display occurs is not included in the variable command, the reach display is displayed by the voice emission control device 90, which is the control device on the sub side, based on the information related to the display duration. It is possible to determine whether or not it occurs. In this sense, it can be said that the variable command indirectly includes information on whether or not a reach display occurs. The variable command may directly include information on whether or not reach display occurs.

The type command contains information related to the result of success or failure. In other words, the type command includes each information related to the "big hit winning", the "special loss result", and the "normal loss result" as the information related to the win / fail result. In addition, the type command includes information related to the distribution result. In other words, the type command has information related to the distribution result, such as "low probability result", "unspecified small round high probability result", "explicit small round high probability result", and "most advantageous result". Contains information.
In the following description, the winning / failing result and the sorting result are collectively referred to as a game result. In other words, the type command contains information related to the game result.

In step S818, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, and causes the main display unit 45 to start variable display based on the determination result. After that, the MPU 62 ends the fluctuation start process.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 64, the first one is based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 36 at the time of digesting the game times. Since it indicates that the result display unit 45a starts the variable display, the first result display unit 45a is made to start the variable display.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 is second based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 37 at the time of digesting the game times. Since it indicates that the result display unit 45b starts the variable display, the second result display unit 45b is made to start the variable display.

Returning to the description of the game time control process, the game time progress process of steps S606 to S609 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S602, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the main display unit 45 is in the variable display, and if it is determined that the main display unit 45 is in the variable display, the MPU 62 is for advancing the game times in steps S606 to S609. Execute the process.

In step S606, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the display duration set in step S816 of the fluctuation start process has elapsed. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value set in the display duration counter of the RAM 64 is "0" or less. The value of this display duration counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S606 that the display duration has not elapsed, the MPU 62 executes the variable display process in step S607. In this variation display process, the MPU 62 updates the display of the main display unit 45 during the variation display. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game times control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S606 that the display duration has elapsed, the MPU 62 executes the variation end processing in step S608. In this variation end process, the MPU 62 stores information (main) stored in the RAM 64 in any of the processes of step S810, step S813, and step S815 of the variation start process executed when the main display unit 45 starts the variation display. Information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the display unit 45) is specified. Then, at the end of the game round, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the main display unit 45 so that the pattern corresponding to the specified information is displayed on the main display unit 45 during the variable display.

Here, the pattern that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 differs depending on the type of game result. Therefore, the manager of the game hall or the like can confirm the game result by visually observing the main display unit 45 at the end of the game round. According to this, the manager of the amusement park can easily confirm, for example, whether or not a fraudulent act is performed to make the pachinko machine 10 perform the same behavior as when the lottery for the occurrence of a big hit is won. Can be done
Further, the main display unit 45 has a narrower display area than the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and the symbol to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 is a symbol sequence to be stopped and displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Compared to Z1 to Z3, it is difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, at the end of the game round, the player determines whether or not the jackpot has been won by checking the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 instead of the main display unit 45. It is possible to increase the degree of attention to the screen G.

In step S609, the MPU 62 sets the variable end command. The MPU 62 transmits the variation end command set in step S609 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S401 of the normal process. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game times control process.
The voice emission control device 90 executes a process for ending the effect of the game round based on the variable end command transmitted from the MPU 62. Here, the voice emission control device 90 may be configured to independently end the production of the game times without requiring the reception of the variable end command.

<Game state transition process>
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game state transition process.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 executes steps S901 to S914 as shown in FIG. 23.
In step S901, the MPU 62 determines whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S902.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that it is in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S911.

First, in step S901, the process when the MPU 62 determines that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (processes after step S902) will be described.
In step S902, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the variable display of the main display unit 45 has been completed. When it is determined in step S902 that the variation display of the main display unit 45 has not been completed, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that the variable display of the main display unit 45 is completed, whether or not the hit / fail result corresponds to the shift to the open / close execution mode in step S903. Is determined. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning / failing result is a "big hit winning" or a "special losing result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the result of success or failure corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 sets the open / close execution mode flag in the RAM 64 and then executes the processes after step S904.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the winning / failing result does not correspond to the transition to the open / close execution mode (when it is determined that the winning / failing result is a "normally out of order result"), the game End the state transition process.

In step S904, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S904 that the hit / fail result is a "special miss result", the MPU 62 sets "2" in the open / close counter SOC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S905. This open / close counter SOC is a counter for specifying the total number of times that the large winning opening 38a of the variable winning device 38 is opened / closed by the MPU 62 when shifting to the open / close execution mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S904 that the winning / failing result is not a "special missed result", that is, when the winning / failing result is determined to be a "big hit winning", the sorting result is determined in step S906. Is a low-round high-accuracy result (“unspecified low-round high-accuracy result” or “explicit low-round high-accuracy result”).

When the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the distribution result is a small round high accuracy result, in step S907, "2" is set in the round counter RC provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the distribution result is not a small round high accuracy result, that is, when the distribution result is determined to be a "low accuracy result" or a "most advantageous result", the step. In S908, the round number setting process is executed. In this round number setting process, the MPU 62 sets “4” or “16” in the round counter RC provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. This round counter RC is a counter for specifying the number of round games by the MPU 62 when shifting to the open / close execution mode.

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the round number setting process.
In the round number setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1012 as shown in FIG. 24.
In step S1001, the MPU 62 clears the round game execution flag (4 round execution flag and 16 round execution flag) stored in the RAM 64.
In step S1002, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the non-electric accessory 51 is being opened by determining whether or not the non-electric accessory open detection sensor 519 has detected the opening of the non-electric accessory 51. To do.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1002 that the non-electric accessory 51 is not open, the MPU 62 sets a non-open command in step S1003. The MPU 62 transmits the non-opening command set in step S1003 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S401 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the non-opening command transmitted from the MPU 62. This process will be described in detail later.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1002 that the non-electric accessory 51 is being opened, the MPU 62 sets an open command in step S1004. The MPU 62 transmits the open command set in step S1004 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S401 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the open command transmitted from the MPU 62. This process will be described in detail later.

After executing the process of step S1003 or step S1004, the MPU 62 executes the crune route setting process in step S1005. In this crune route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a in the closed state and sets the right variable entry mechanism 52 to the crune route by executing the drive control of the plate drive unit 523c.

In step S1006, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the round game execution flag (4 round execution flag or 16 round execution flag) is set in the RAM 64. In other words, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the round game execution gate (4 round execution gate or 16 round execution gate) after executing the crune route setting process.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the round game execution flag is not set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 executes step S1006 again.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the round game execution flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 determines in step S1007 whether or not the four round execution flag is set in the RAM 64. ..

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1007 that the four-round execution flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 sets “4” in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S1008.
In step S1009, the MPU 92 sets a four-round execution command. The MPU 62 transmits the four-round execution command set in step S1009 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S401 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the four-round execution command transmitted from the MPU 62. This process will be described in detail later.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1007 that the 4-round execution flag is not set in the RAM 64 (when it is determined that the 16-round execution flag is set in the RAM 64), the MPU 62 in step S1010. , "16" is set in the round counter RC provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.
In step S1011 the MPU 92 sets a 16-round execution command. The MPU 62 transmits the 16-round execution command set in step S1011 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S401 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the 16-round execution command transmitted from the MPU 62. This process will be described in detail later.

After executing the process of step S1009 or step S1011, the MPU 62 executes the discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this discharge route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state and sets the right variable entry mechanism 52 to the discharge route by executing the drive control of the plate drive unit 523c. After that, the MPU 62 ends the round number setting process.

In this way, the MPU 62 sets the right variable entry mechanism 52 to the crune route, and then the right variable entry is triggered when the game ball enters the round game execution gate (4 round execution gate or 16 round execution gate). Since the ball mechanism 52 is set to the discharge route, the crune 53 may enter a plurality of game balls depending on the timing of setting the right variable entry mechanism 52 to the discharge route. In this case, the MPU 62 sets the number of round games based on the round game execution gate in which one of the plurality of game balls first enters, so that the player can play the game. It is possible to improve the degree of attention of.
In the present embodiment, the crune 53 is configured so that a plurality of game balls may be inserted, but may be configured so that a plurality of game balls may not be inserted.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of open / close execution modes in which the end conditions are different from each other. Specifically, as the opening / closing execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 has a round number regulation mode that shifts when the winning / failing result is "big hit winning" and an opening / closing number that shifts when the winning / failing result is "special loss result". It has a specified mode.

The round number regulation mode ends on condition that a predetermined number of round games have been executed. Here, the number of round games corresponds to the value set in the round counter RC.
The opening / closing number regulation mode ends on the condition that the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed a predetermined total number of times, or that a predetermined number of game balls have won the large winning opening 38a. Here, the total number of times of opening and closing of the large winning opening 38a corresponds to the value set in the opening / closing counter SOC. This open / close number regulation mode does not end on the condition that the number of times the round game is executed.

The pachinko machine 10 opens and closes the large winning opening 38a once for each round game. In addition, one round game continues until one of the following two conditions is met. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening / closing door 38b to the open state, and then sets the opening / closing door 38b to the closed state again by satisfying one of the following two conditions.
(1) The predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) has elapsed. (2) The total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a reaches the predetermined upper limit.

Returning to the description of the game state transition process, the processes after step S909 will be described with reference to FIG. 23.
After executing any of the processes of step S905, step S907, and step S908, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 as a waiting time (standby period) for opening in step S909. Set "1000". The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the opening is 2 sec. The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

As described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the hit / fail result corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the timer counter T is set to the waiting time for opening regardless of the type of the game result. set. In other words, the waiting time for the opening is the same regardless of the type of game result.
The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this, and for example, the waiting time may be slightly different depending on the type of the game result to the extent that the player recognizes the same. Further, for example, the waiting time for the opening differs greatly between the case where the game result is the "low probability result" or the "most advantageous result" and the case where the game result is other than these. The configuration may be significantly different depending on the type of.

In step S910, the MPU 62 sets the opening command. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process. This opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode. In addition, the opening command includes information on the number of round games when the game result is a "low probability result" or a "most advantageous result". The MPU 62 transmits the opening command set in step S910 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S401 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes the transition to the open / close execution mode based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process. This process will be described in detail later.

Next, in step S901, the process when the MPU 62 determines that the open / close execution mode is in progress (processes after step S911) will be described.
In step S911, the MPU 62 executes the large winning opening opening / closing process.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a large winning opening opening / closing process.
In the large winning opening opening / closing process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1124 as shown in FIG.
In step S1101, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the large winning opening 38a is open.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the large winning opening 38a is not open, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1102.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the large winning opening 38a is open, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1106.

First, in step S1101, a process when the MPU 62 determines that the large winning opening 38a is not open (processes after step S1102) will be described.
In step S1102, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1102 that both the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are “0” or less, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1102 that at least one of the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, the timer counter T is set in step S1103. It is determined whether or not the value is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1103 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1103 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the large winning opening opening process in step S1104.
Hereinafter, the process of opening the large winning opening in step S1104 will be described in detail.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the large winning opening opening process.
In the large winning opening opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1201 to S1207 as shown in FIG.
In step S1201, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the hit / fail result is a "special miss result", in step S1202, "8" is set in the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64, and the step In S1203, "85" is set in the timer counter T. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 sec.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the win / fail result is not a "special miss result", the MPU 62 sets "8" in the winning counter PC in step S1204, and in step S1205, the distribution result. Is a low-round high-accuracy result (“unspecified low-round high-accuracy result” or “explicit low-round high-accuracy result”).

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1205 that the distribution result is a low-round high-accuracy result, the timer counter T is set to "85" in step S1203 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1205 that the distribution result is not a small round high accuracy result, the timer counter T is set to "15000" in step S1206. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 sec.

After executing the process of step S1203 or step S1206, the MPU 62 executes the opening execution process of the large winning opening 38a in step S1207. In this opening execution process, the MPU 62 sets the opening / closing door 38b to the open state by executing the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 38c. After that, the MPU 62 finishes the large winning opening opening process.

The value set in the winning counter PC in step S1202 or step S1204 defines the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a.
Further, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1203 or step S1206 defines the upper limit duration from setting the opening / closing door 38b to the open state to setting it to the closed state again. Therefore, as described above, the MPU 62 sets two types of upper limit durations having different lengths by setting the timer counter T to "85" or "15000". Specifically, the MPU 62 has a long-term mode in which the upper limit duration is set to 30 sec (long-term mode) and a short-time mode in which the upper limit duration is set to 0.17 sec, which is shorter than that of the long-time mode (short-term mode). Aspect) and is set.

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 causes the game ball launching mechanism 81 to launch the game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball launching mechanism 81 at a cycle of 0.6 sec. Further, as described above, the MPU 62 sets the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a to 8 by setting "8" in the winning counter PC.
Therefore, the upper limit duration of the long-time mode is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a and the firing cycle of the game balls, and thus the upper limit of eight game balls. Is easy to win in the large winning opening 38a.
On the other hand, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is shorter than the product of the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a and the firing cycle of the game balls (more specifically, the firing of the game balls). Since it is shorter than the cycle), it is difficult to make the game ball win the big winning opening 38a. Depending on the timing, it is possible to make about one game ball win in the large winning opening 38a.

Returning to the description of the large winning opening opening / closing process, the processes after step S1105 will be described with reference to FIG. 25.
The MPU 62 sets the release command in step S1105 after executing the large winning opening opening process in step S1104. Further, the MPU 62 transmits the release command set in step S1105 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S401 of the normal process. After that, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, in step S1101, a process when the MPU 62 determines that the large winning opening 38a is open (processes after step S1106) will be described.
In step S1106, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less. That is, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the upper limit duration set in the timer counter T has elapsed in step S1203 or step S1206 of the large winning opening opening process.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1106 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1107.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1106 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1118.

First, in step S1106, processing when the value of the timer counter T is determined by the MPU 62 to be not "0" or less (processing after step S1107) will be described.
In step S1107, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a prize has been generated in the large winning opening 38a. The determination as to whether or not a prize has been generated in the large winning opening 38a is executed based on the detection result of the detection sensor 40d corresponding to the large winning opening 38a.

When it is determined in step S1107 that the winning opening 38a has not been won, the MPU 62 ends the opening / closing process of the winning opening.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1107 that a prize has been generated in the large winning opening 38a, the MPU 62 updates by subtracting 1 from the value of the winning counter PC in step S1108.

In step S1109, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1109 that the value of the winning counter PC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1109 that the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the closing execution process in step S1110. In this closing execution process, the MPU 62 sets the opening / closing door 38b to the closed state by executing the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 38c.

In step S1111, the MPU 62 sets the closure command. The MPU 62 transmits the closing command set in step S1111 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S401 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state based on the closing command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S1112, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1112 that the result of success or failure is a "special deviation result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1123 described later.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1112 that the hit / fail result is not the "special miss result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1113.
In step S1113, the MPU 62 is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC.

In step S1114, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1114 that the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 sets the value of the timer counter T to "500" in step S1115. After that, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.

Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1115 is an open standby until the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state, the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state again, and the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state again. The time is specified. In this embodiment, the opening standby time is 1 sec. This opening standby time is the same regardless of the type and progress of the opening / closing execution mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1114 that the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1116.
In step S1116, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T to "2000" as the waiting time (waiting period) for the ending. As described above, the value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the ending is 4 sec. The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

The waiting time for the ending is the same as the waiting time for the opening regardless of the type of the game result. That is, the waiting time for this ending is the same regardless of the type of open / close execution mode.
The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this, and may be configured to be slightly different depending on the type of the game result to the extent that the player recognizes the same. Further, for example, the waiting time for the ending is significantly different between the case where the game result is the "low probability result" or the "most advantageous result" and the case where the game result is other than these. The configuration may be significantly different depending on the type of.

In step S1117, the MPU 62 sets the ending command. This ending command includes information on whether or not the non-electric accessory 51 is open. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the non-electric accessory 51 is being opened by determining whether or not the non-electric accessory open detection sensor 519 has detected the opening of the non-electric accessory 51. Judgment is made and this information is included in the ending command. The MPU 62 transmits the ending command set in step S1117 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S401 of the normal process. After that, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes the end of the open / close execution mode based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, in step S1106, processing when the value of the timer counter T is determined by the MPU 62 to be “0” or less (processing after step S1118) will be described.
In step S1118, the MPU 62 executes the closing execution process in the same manner as in step S1110 described above.
In step S1119, the MPU 62 sets the close command in the same manner as in step S1111 described above.

In step S1120, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”.
The MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1121 when it is determined in step S1120 that the winning / failing result is not the “special missed result”, that is, when the winning / failing result is determined to be the “big hit winning”.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1120 that the hit / fail result is a "special miss result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1123.

First, in step S1120, a process (processing after step S1121) when the hit / fail result is determined by the MPU 62 to be not a “special deviation result” will be described.
In step S1121, the MPU 62 updates by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC.

In step S1122, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1122 that the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1115 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1122 that the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less, the MPU 62 executes the above-described S1116 and subsequent processes.

Next, in step S1112 or step S1120, a process (processes after step S1123) when the hit / fail result is determined by the MPU 62 to be a “special deviation result” will be described.
In step S1123, the MPU 62 is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the open / close counter SOC.

In step S1124, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1124 that the value of the open / close counter SOC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1115 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1124 that the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the above-described S1116 and subsequent processes.

Returning to the description of the game state transition process, the processes after step S912 will be described with reference to FIG. 23.
After executing the large winning opening opening / closing process in step S911, the MPU 62 determines in step S912 whether the opening / closing counter SOC value is "0" or less and the round counter RC value is "0" or less. judge.

When it is determined in step S912 that at least one of the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S912 that both the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are "0" or less, the value of the timer counter T becomes "0" or less in step S913. It is determined whether or not it is 0 "or less.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S913 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S913 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, the MPU 62 clears the open / close execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64 in step S914, and then clears the open / close execution mode flag. Executes the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process.
Hereinafter, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode will be described in detail.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.
In the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes steps S1301 to S1312 as shown in FIG. 27.
In step S1301, the MPU 62 determines whether the distribution result is the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit small round high probability result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1301 that the distribution result is the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit small round high probability result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1302.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1301 that the distribution result is not the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit small round high probability result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1305.

First, in step S1301, the process when the MPU 62 determines that the distribution result is the “most advantageous result” or the “explicit small round high probability result” (processes after step S1302) will be described.
In step S1302, the MPU 62 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.

In step S1303, the MPU 62 clears the number-of-times limit flag stored in the RAM 64.
Here, the high-frequency support mode continues until the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number-of-times limit flag is not set, at least until a "big hit win" is obtained in the winning / failing lottery.

In step S1304, the MPU 62 sets the high probability mode flag in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the high probability mode flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the winning / failing lottery mode to the high probability mode. This high-probability mode continues until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning or losing lottery. After that, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.

At the end of the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 sets a flag (low probability result flag, unspecified small round high probability result flag, explicit small round height) set in the RAM 64 according to the distribution result. Clear the probability result flag and the most advantageous result flag) and the special off flag. Further, in step S801 of the fluctuation start processing described above, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode by determining whether or not the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 64. There is.

Next, in step S1301, the process when the MPU 62 determines that the distribution result is not the “most advantageous result” or the “explicit small round high probability result” (processes after step S1305) will be described.
In step S1305, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is an “unspecified small round high probability result”.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1305 that the distribution result is an "unspecified small round high probability result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1306.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1305 that the distribution result is not the "unspecified small round high probability result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1308.

First, in step S1305, a process (processes after step S1306) when the distribution result is determined by the MPU 62 to be an “unspecified small round high accuracy result” will be described.
In step S1306, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1306 that the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1303 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1306 that the high-frequency support flag is not set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 sets the high-probability mode flag in the RAM 64 in step S1307. The MPU 62 maintains the high probability mode flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the winning / failing lottery mode to the high probability mode. This high-probability mode continues until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning or losing lottery. After that, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.

Next, in step S1305, a process (processes after step S1308) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the distribution result is not the “unspecified low round high accuracy result” will be described.
In step S1308, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is a “low probability result”.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1308 that the distribution result is not a "low probability result" (when it is determined that the hit / fail result is a "special deviation result"), the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode. To do.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1308 that the distribution result is a "low probability result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1309.

In step S1309, the MPU 62 clears the high probability mode flag. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the winning / failing lottery mode to the low probability mode. This low-probability mode continues until at least the winning / losing lottery becomes a "big hit" and the distribution result is other than the "low probability result".

In step S1310, the MPU 62 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1311, the MPU 62 sets “100” to the value of the game count counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.
In step S1312, the MPU 62 sets the number-of-times limit flag in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the number-of-times limit flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64. After that, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number-of-times limit flag is set, 100 games, which is the end reference number set in the game count counter, are played. Continue until the times are digested. The MPU 62 clears the high-frequency support flag and the number-of-times limit flag when 100 game times have been completed. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.
The MPU 62 executes these processes as the electric service support process in step S406 of the normal process, but detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, if the winning / losing lottery results in a "big hit" and the distribution result becomes the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit small round high probability result" in the distribution lottery, the gaming state is the current state. Regardless of the game state, after the opening / closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends, the mode shifts to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode continue until at least a "big win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

In addition, when the current support mode is the high frequency support mode, if the winning / losing lottery results in a "big hit" and the distribution result becomes an "unspecified small round high probability result" in the distribution lottery, After the opening / closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends, the game state shifts to the high probability mode and also shifts to the high frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode continue until at least a "big win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

On the other hand, when the current support mode is the low frequency support mode, the winning / failing lottery results in a "big hit" and the sorting result becomes an "unspecified small round high probability result" in the sorting lottery. In the game state, after the opening / closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends, the game state shifts to the high probability mode and also to the low frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode continue until at least a "big win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

In addition, when the winning / losing lottery results in a "big hit" and the distribution result becomes a "low probability result" in the distribution lottery, the game state is in the open / close execution mode (that is, regardless of the current game state). After the end of the round number regulation mode), the mode shifts to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The low-probability mode continues until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning or losing lottery, and the high-frequency support mode is low when 100 game times are completed without becoming a "big hit winning" in the winning or losing lottery. Move to frequency support mode.

In addition, if the winning / failing lottery does not result in a "big hit", that is, if the winning / failing result becomes a "special loss result" or a "normal loss result" in the win / loss lottery, the gaming state does not shift.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game state transition process opens and closes when the game ball enters any of the non-electric accessory 51 and each of the holes 533A to 533C after shifting the game state to the open / close execution mode. It functions as a specific control start unit that starts the game in the execution mode.

<Electrical configuration of voice emission control device 90 and display control device 100>
FIG. 28 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the voice emission control device and the display control device.
As shown in FIG. 28, the voice emission control device 90 includes a voice emission control board 91, an MPU 92 mounted on the voice light emission control board 91, and a ROM 93 and a RAM 94 constituting the MPU 92. Here, the MPU 92 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are combined into a chip in addition to the ROM 93 and the RAM 94.

The ROM 93 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply for holding the stored information.
The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a control program stored in the ROM 93, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply for holding the stored information. Is. The RAM 94 has various areas such as a command list storage area 94a.

The MPU 92 includes an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the main control device 60 as described above. The output port of the MPU 92 is connected to various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c, a speaker unit 24, and a display control device 100.
The MPU 92 executes drive control of the various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c and the speaker unit 24 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60.
Further, the MPU 92 transmits a command as a result of analyzing these commands to the display control device 100. The voice emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) provided with connectors at both ends of the signal line.

The display control device 100 includes a display control board 101, an MPU 102, a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 constituting the MPU 102, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Here, the MPU 102 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are combined into a chip in addition to the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104. The MPU 102, VDP 105, character ROM 106, and video RAM 107 are mounted on the display control board 101.

The MPU 102 analyzes a command transmitted from the voice emission control device 90, performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on this command, and executes control of the VDP 105. Specifically, the MPU 102 executes control of the VDP 105 by generating a command for the VDP 105.

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply for holding the stored information.
The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a control program stored in the program ROM 103, and is volatile that requires an external power supply for holding the stored information. It is a means of memory.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 47. Since the VDP 105 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 reads image data from the character ROM 106 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 102, and stores the image data in the video RAM 107.

The character ROM 106 functions as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 47. The character ROM 106 holds bitmap format image data of various symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.
The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 47, and the display content of the symbol display device 47 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107.

<About timer interrupt processing executed by the voice emission control device 90>
FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the voice emission control device.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes a timer interrupt process for advancing the game. In this timer interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 29, the MPU 92 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) executes steps S1401 to S1405.

In step S1401, the MPU 92 executes the command storage process. In this command storage process, when the MPU 92 receives a command from the MPU 62, the MPU 92 stores the command in the RAM 94. Specifically, the RAM 94 has a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the MPU 62, and the MPU 92 stores the commands in the ring buffer in the order received from the MPU 62. The MPU 92 reads commands from the ring buffer in the order stored in the ring buffer.

In step S1402, the MPU 92 executes the effect determination process based on the command received from the MPU 62. In the effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines the effect for the game round, the effect for the open / close execution mode, and the like.
In step S1403, the MPU 92 executes the effect execution process based on the content of the effect determination process in step S1402. Specifically, in the effect execution process, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c, and executes voice control of the speaker unit 24.

In step S1404, the MPU 92 executes the demo display execution process based on the demo command received from the MPU 62. In the demo display execution process, the MPU 92 executes the demo display when a predetermined start waiting period for the start of the demo (for example, 30 sec) has elapsed without starting a new game round after the end of the game round. .. Specifically, in the demo display execution process, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of various lamp units 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24.

In step S1405, a command transmission process for transmitting the command set in the effect determination process of step S1402 to the display control device 100 is executed. In this command transmission process, the MPU 92 determines whether or not it is time to transmit various commands stored as a command list in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94 to the display control device 100, and transmits various commands to the display control device 100. When it is determined that the timing of transmission to is reached, the command is transmitted to the display control device 100. After that, the MPU 92 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Regarding the effect determination process executed by the voice emission control device 90>
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the effect determination process in order to execute the effect for the game round, the effect for the open / close execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S1501 to S1518 as shown in FIG.

In step S1501, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62 have been received.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1501 that each command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S1509.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that each command has been received in step S1501, the game result is "most advantageous result" or "low probability" based on the content of the type command in step S1502. It is determined whether or not it is a "result".

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1502 that the game result is the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result", the MPU 92 executes the symbol determination process corresponding to the type of the game result in step S1503. In this symbol determination process, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the same odd number or the same even number is used as the stop result to finally display the stop on the effective line L. When the information related to the combination of symbols having numbers is determined and it is determined that the game result is a "low probability result", the same even number is displayed as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the effective line L. Determine the information related to the combination of symbols to have. The odd and even numbers are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1502 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result", the game result is "in step S1504" based on the content of the type command. It is determined whether or not the result is "normally out of order".
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1504 that the game result is not the "normal deviation result", that is, the game result is the "special deviation result", the "unspecified small round high probability result", and the "explicit small round high probability result". In the case of any of the above, in step S1505, a common symbol determination process is executed. In this common symbol determination process, the MPU 92 determines information related to a special symbol combination as a stop result that is finally stopped and displayed on the effective line L. Specifically, the MPU 92 is not a combination of symbols having the same number, but a combination of special symbols having different numbers that are not selected when a "normally out-of-order result" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery (for example). "3.4.1") is decided. The combination of these special symbols is the same regardless of the type of game result.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1504 that the game result is a "normal deviation result", the MPU 92 executes a symbol determination process for normal deviation in step S1506. In this pattern determination process for normal deviation, the MPU 92 determines whether or not reach display occurs based on the content of the variable command.

When the MPU 92 determines that the reach display occurs, the MPU 92 determines the information related to the combination of the symbols of the reach display as the stop result of finally displaying the stop display on the effective line L. The combination of the reach display symbols is randomly determined by lottery or the like.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 92 provides information related to a combination of symbols different from the combination of the above-mentioned symbols as a stop result of finally displaying the stop on the effective line L. decide. Specifically, the MPU 92 randomly determines a combination of symbols having the same number, a combination of special symbols, and a combination of symbols different from the combination of reach display symbols by lottery or the like.

After executing any of the processes of step S1503, step S1505, and step S1506, the MPU 92 executes the effect pattern determination process in step S1507. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93. Specifically, the MPU 92 selects the effect duration (effect duration) and the content of the effect as the effect pattern. In step S1507, the MPU 92 also executes a lottery as to whether or not to generate a notice display.

Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S1403 described above based on the selected effect pattern.

In step S1508, the MPU 92 sets a fluctuation start command and a stop result command including information related to the stop result determined in any of the processes of step S1503, step S1505, and step S1506. Then, the MPU 92 stores the fluctuation start command and the stop result command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. These fluctuation start commands and stop result commands are transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S1405 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 displays a data table from the program ROM 103 for executing the display of the start and stop results of the variation display on the symbol display device 47 based on the variation start command and the stop result command transmitted from the MPU 92. read out. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 finally stops and displays the stop result determined by the MPU 92 on the effective line L after starting the variable display.

After executing the process of step S1508, or when it is determined in step S1501 that the change command and the type command have not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes of step S1509 and subsequent steps.
In step S1509, the MPU 92 executes the process of determining the number of rounds.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a process for determining the number of rounds.
In the process of determining the number of rounds, the MPU 92 executes steps S1601 to S1612 as shown in FIG.
In step S1601, the MPU 92 determines whether or not it has received the non-opening command transmitted from the MPU 62.
When the MPU 92 determines that the non-opening command is received in step S1601, the MPU 92 executes the non-opening effect determination process in step S1602. In this non-opening effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects the content of the effect corresponding to the non-opening command by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93.

Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S1403 described above based on the content of the selected effect.

In step S1603, the MPU 92 sets a non-opening effect command related to the non-opening effect determined in the non-opening effect determination process of step S1602. Then, the MPU 92 stores the non-opening effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. This non-opening effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process in step S1405 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the non-opening effect on the symbol display device 47 based on the non-opening effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the non-opening effect.

After executing the process of step S1603, or when it is determined in step S1601 that the MPU 92 has not received the non-opening command, is the MPU 92 receiving the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62 in step S1604? Judge whether or not.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1604 that it has received the opening command, it executes the opening effect determination process in step S1605. In the process of determining the effect at the time of opening, the MPU 92 selects the content of the effect corresponding to the command at the time of opening by referring to the table for the effect stored in advance in the ROM 93.

Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S1403 described above based on the content of the selected effect.

In step S1606, the MPU 92 sets the opening effect command related to the opening effect determined in the opening effect determination process of step S1605. Then, the MPU 92 stores the opening production command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. This open-time effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S1405 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads a data table for executing the opening effect on the symbol display device 47 from the program ROM 103 based on the opening effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the effect at the time of opening.

If the MPU 92 has executed the process of step S1606, or if it is determined in step S1604 that the open command has not been received, has the MPU 92 received the four-round execution command transmitted from the MPU 62 in step S1607? Judge whether or not.
When the MPU 92 determines that the 4-round execution command has been received in step S1607, the MPU 92 executes the determination process of the 4-round execution effect in step S1608. In the determination process of the 4-round execution effect, the MPU 92 selects the content of the effect corresponding to the 4-round execution command by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93.

Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S1403 described above based on the content of the selected effect.

In step S1609, the MPU 92 sets a command for the 4-round execution effect related to the 4-round execution effect determined in the determination process of the 4-round execution effect in step S1608. Then, the MPU 92 stores the four-round execution effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. This four-round execution effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S1405 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads a data table for executing the 4-round execution effect on the symbol display device 47 from the program ROM 103 based on the 4-round execution effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the four-round execution effect.

After executing the process of step S1609, or when it is determined in step S1607 that the MPU 92 has not received the 4-round execution command, the MPU 92 receives the 16-round execution command transmitted from the MPU 62 in step S1610. Judge whether or not.
When the MPU 92 determines that the 16-round execution command has been received in step S1610, the MPU 92 executes the determination process of the 16-round execution effect in step S1611. In the determination process of the 16-round execution effect, the MPU 92 selects the content of the effect corresponding to the 16-round execution command by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93.

Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S1403 described above based on the content of the selected effect.

In step S1612, the MPU 92 sets a 16-round execution effect command related to the 16-round execution effect determined in the determination process of the 16-round execution effect in step S1611. Then, the MPU 92 stores the 16-round execution effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. This 16-round execution effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S1405 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads a data table for executing the 16-round execution effect on the symbol display device 47 from the program ROM 103 based on the 16-round execution effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the 16-round execution effect.

After executing the process of step S1612, or when it is determined in step S1610 that the 16-round execution command has not been received, the MPU 92 ends the process of determining the number of rounds.

Returning to the description of the effect determination process, the processes after step S1510 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S1510, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the opening command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1510 that the opening command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S1514.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S1510, the MPU 92 determines the type of the game result in step S1511 based on the content of the opening command.

In step S1512, the MPU 92 executes the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode corresponding to the type of game result determined in step S1511. In the process of determining the effect for the open / close execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1511 that the game result is a "special deviation result" or a "non-explicit small round high probability result", the MPU 92 is used for the open / close execution mode. Select production A as the production. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is an "explicit small round high probability result", the MPU 92 selects the effect B as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result" and determines that the number of round games is four, the MPU 92 selects the effect C1 or the effect D1 as the effect for the open / close execution mode. To do. Further, the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", and when it is determined that the number of round games is 16 times, the effect C2 or the effect D2 is selected as the effect for the open / close execution mode. To do. Further, the MPU 92 determines that the game result is a "low probability result", and when it is determined that the number of round games is four, the effect D1 is selected as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Further, the MPU 92 determines that the game result is a "low probability result", and when it is determined that the number of round games is 16, the effect D2 is selected as the effect for the open / close execution mode.

The duration of the effect A and the effect B corresponds to the time when the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, the duration of the effect C1 and the effect D1 corresponds to the time when the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed four times in the long-time mode in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, the duration of the effect C2 and the effect D2 corresponds to the time when the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed 16 times in the long-time mode in the opening / closing execution mode.
In the following description, the effect C1 and the effect C2 are also simply referred to as the effect C, and the effect D1 and the effect D2 are also simply referred to as the effect D.

Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S1403 described above based on the selection results of the effects A to D.

In step S1513, the MPU 92 sets a command for opening / closing execution mode including information related to the effect for opening / closing execution mode selected in step S1512. Then, the MPU 92 stores the open / close execution mode command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. This open / close execution mode command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S1405 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the effect for the open / close execution mode on the symbol display device 47 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the effect for the open / close execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90.

After executing the process of step S1513, or when it is determined in step S1510 that the opening command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes of step S1514 and subsequent steps.
In step S1514, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the ending command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has not been received in step S1514, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S1518.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S1514, the MPU 92 executes the release determination process of the non-electric accessory in step S1515. In this non-electric accessory opening determination process, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the non-electric accessory 51 is being opened based on the content of the ending command.

In step S1516, the MPU 92 executes an ending effect determination process corresponding to the state of the non-electric accessory 51 determined in step S1515. In the ending effect determination process, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electric accessory 51 is not open (determined that it is closed), the MPU 92 opens the non-electric accessory 51 as the ending effect. Select a normal production that does not notify the player. On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electric accessory 51 is being opened, the MPU 92 selects an opening notification effect for notifying the player of the release of the non-electric accessory 51 as the ending effect. To do.

In step S1517, the MPU 92 sets an ending effect command related to the ending effect (normal effect or open notification effect) determined in the ending effect determination process of step S1516. Then, the MPU 92 stores the ending effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. This ending effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S1405 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads a data table for executing the ending effect on the symbol display device 47 from the program ROM 103 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the ending effect.

After executing the process of step S1517, or when it is determined that the ending command has not been received in step S1514, the MPU 92 executes other processes in step S1518. In other processes, the MPU 92 executes a process for advancing the effect for the open / close execution mode based on, for example, the open command and the close command transmitted from the MPU 62. After that, the MPU 92 ends the effect determination process.

<Relationship between game results and game status>
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result and the game state based on the execution of various processes will be described.
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the game state and the like. Specifically, FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game result excluding the “normal deviation result” and the game state, and the game results are arranged in the column direction and the game state and the like are arranged in the row direction.
As shown in FIG. 32, the pachinko machine 10 has the winning / failing results of the “big hit winning” and the “special losing result”, the “unspecified small round high probability result”, and the “specified” as the game results excluding the “normal loss result”. It has "small round high probability result", "most advantageous result", and "low probability result" distribution result.

Here, as shown in the second column of the table in FIG. 32, the "special loss result" is a game result selected when the "big hit winning" is not obtained in the winning / losing lottery (symbol x in the figure). In addition, the distribution result is a game result selected when a "big hit win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery (symbol ◯ in the figure).
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result excluding the “normal deviation result” and the game state and the like will be described. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state as follows, but the combination of the game result and the game state, the content of the game result, and the game state, etc. The contents such as the game state are arbitrary.

In the "special deviation result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the opening / closing number specified mode instead of the round number specified mode, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. In addition, the winning / failing lottery mode does not shift in the "special loss result".
In the "unspecified small round high probability result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed up to 2 times, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. Will be done. In addition, in the "unspecified small round high probability result", the winning / failing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode.
As described above, the "special deviation result" and the "unspecified small round high accuracy result" are different in the type of opening / closing execution mode, but are common in that the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. doing.

Further, in the "special deviation result" and the "unspecified small round high probability result", the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is the effect A. Furthermore, the support mode does not shift in the "special off result" and the "unspecified small round high accuracy result". Further, in the game round after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 47 does not display an image clearly indicating that the mode is in the high probability mode on the display screen G.

Therefore, the player cannot grasp whether the game result is a "special deviation result" or an "unspecified small round high probability result" by checking the stop result and the effect for the open / close execution mode. Can not. In other words, even if the distribution lottery results in an "unspecified small round high probability result" and the mode shifts to the high probability mode, the symbol display device 47 will draw a winning / failing lottery in the game round after the opening / closing execution mode ends. The mode is disguised as if it has not changed.
Therefore, the player can play the game while enjoying the prediction of whether or not the winning / losing lottery mode has shifted to the high probability mode.

In the "explicit small round high accuracy result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed up to two times, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. To. In addition, in the "explicit small round high probability result", the winning / failing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. Further, in the "explicit small round high accuracy result", the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is effect B. In addition, in the "explicit small round high accuracy result", the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Further, in the game round after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 47 displays an image clearly indicating that the mode is in the high probability mode on the display screen G.
Therefore, the player can grasp that the game result is the "explicit small round high probability result" by confirming the stop result and the effect for the open / close execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result" and the "low probability result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with the maximum number of times being 4 or 16 times, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is a long time. It is performed 4 or 16 times in the embodiment.
Here, in the "most advantageous result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number or the same even number, and the winning / failing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode for the open / close execution mode. The production of is production C or production D. Specifically, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, the effect for the open / close execution mode is effect C, and the combination of symbols having the same stop result is an even number. If, the effect for the open / close execution mode is effect D.
Further, in the "low probability result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, the winning / losing lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is the effect D. Become. Further, in the "best result" and "low probability result", the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode.

Therefore, the player has the game result as the "most advantageous result" when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number and the effect for the open / close execution mode is the effect C. Can be grasped. However, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, the player confirms the stop result and the effect for the open / close execution mode, so that the game result is the "most advantageous result". And it is not possible to know whether it is a "low probability result".

Then, in the game round after the opening / closing execution mode ends, if the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is finally the effect D, the symbol display device 47 displays an image clearly indicating that the mode is in the high probability mode on the display screen G. do not.

Specifically, the symbol display device 47 does not display an image clearly indicating that it is in the high probability mode on the display screen G, and in the high frequency support mode, the game times are completed as the reference number of times (specifically, 100). When the number of times is reached, an image notifying the transition to the low frequency support mode is displayed on the display screen G. In other words, even if the "most advantageous result" is obtained in the distribution lottery, the symbol display device 47 finally produces the effect for the open / close execution mode in the game round after the end of the open / close execution mode. If so, disguise as if the game result was a "low probability result".

Then, when the distribution result is the "most advantageous result", the symbol display device 47 is in the high probability mode after 100 game times are completed without becoming a "big hit winning" in the winning / losing lottery. An image clearly indicating that is displayed on the display screen G. In other words, the symbol display device 47 releases the camouflage that was applied as if the game result was a "low probability result".

<About the flow when shifting to the open / close execution mode>
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a display screen of a symbol display device, a non-electric accessory, and a right-side variable ball entry mechanism when the non-electric accessory is shifted to the open / close execution mode when the non-electric accessory is not opened. Note that FIG. 33 shows a simplified non-electric accessory 51 at the lower left of the display screen G.
Specifically, FIG. 33A is a diagram showing a display screen G at the time of transition to the open / close execution mode. 33 (B) and 33 (C) are views showing a display screen G when a ball enters the 4-round execution gate. 33 (D) and 33 (E) are views showing a display screen G when a ball enters the 16-round execution gate. FIG. 33 (F) is a diagram showing a display screen G when the opening notification effect for notifying the player of the opening of the non-electric accessory 51 is selected as the ending effect.

When the non-electric accessory 51 shifts to the open / close execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 102 reduces each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 to display the display screen of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. 33 (A). It is arranged at the lower left position of G, and the variation display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is stopped.
Here, when the non-electric accessory 51 shifts to the open / close execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 92 determines in step S1601 that the non-opening command has been received. The effect determination process is executed, and in step S1603, a non-opening effect command related to the non-opening effect determined in the non-opening effect determination process of step S1602 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the non-opening effect based on the non-opening effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 tells the player to hit right by displaying the angel's line "Aim for the crune by hitting right!" Existing in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Suggest.

Further, the MPU 62 executes the crune route setting process in step S1005. In this crune route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the closed state and sets the right variable entry mechanism 52 to the crune route by executing the drive control of the plate drive unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Here, since the blade member 521a is intermittently opened and closed at a cycle of 2 seconds, when the blade member 521a is set to the open state by the blade member driving unit 521c, the game ball tilts the blade member 521a. The ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 through the blade member 521a. Further, when the plate 523a is set to the closed state and set to the crune route, the game ball that reaches the branch position of the guide passage 522 after entering the right variable entry mechanism 52 is the guide rail 525. Will be guided to. After that, the game ball is guided to the crune 53 via the guide rail 525.
After that, the game ball guided to the crune 53 via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532, and then enters any of the holes 533A to 533C.

When a ball enters the holes 533B and 533C (four-round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines that the four-round execution command has been received in step S1607. In step S1609, the command for the 4-round execution effect related to the 4-round execution effect determined in the determination process of the 4-round execution effect in step S1608 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 4-round execution effect based on the 4-round execution effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33 (B), the MPU 102 displays the angel's line "4R confirmed! Right-handed!" Existing in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Notify the player that the execution of four round games is to be started.

Further, the MPU 62 executes the discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this discharge route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state and sets the right variable entry mechanism 52 to the discharge route by executing the drive control of the plate drive unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

After that, the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S1510. Therefore, in step S1511, the type of the game result is determined based on the content of the opening command, and the game result determined in step S1511 is determined. Executes the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode corresponding to the type. In the example of FIG. 33, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result, so that the MPU 92 is displayed. , It is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Further, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is four, the effect C1 is selected as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the open / close execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

After finishing the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S1514. Therefore, in step S1515, the opening determination process of the non-electric accessory is executed. When a ball enters the holes 533B and 533C (4 round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electric accessory 51 is not open, so the non-electric accessory 51 is used as an ending effect. Select a normal production that does not notify the player of the opening of. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 33, since the effect C1 is selected as the effect for the open / close execution mode, the MPU 102 is centered on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. 33 (C). By displaying the line of the angel that exists in "Probability change rush!", The player is notified that the mode has been changed to the high probability mode.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the hole 533A (16-round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines that the 16-round execution command has been received in step S1610. The round execution effect determination process is executed, and in step S1612, a 16-round execution effect command related to the 16-round execution effect determined in the 16-round execution effect determination process of step S1611 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 16-round execution effect based on the 16-round execution effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33 (D), the MPU 102 displays the angel line "16R confirmed! Right-handed!" Existing in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Notify the player that the execution of 16 round games will be started. Further, the game ball that enters the hole 533A of the crune 53, falls downward, and is guided to the non-electric accessory 51 via the connecting passage 535 shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state. Let me.

Further, the MPU 62 executes the discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this discharge route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state and sets the right variable entry mechanism 52 to the discharge route by executing the drive control of the plate drive unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

After that, the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S1510. Therefore, in step S1511, the type of the game result is determined based on the content of the opening command, and the game result determined in step S1511 is determined. Executes the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode corresponding to the type. In the example of FIG. 33, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result, so that the MPU 92 is displayed. , It is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Further, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is 16 times, the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the open / close execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

After finishing the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S1514. Therefore, in step S1515, the opening determination process of the non-electric accessory is executed. When a ball enters the hole 533A (16 round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electric accessory 51 is open, so that the non-electric accessory 51 is used as an ending effect. Select the opening notification effect that notifies the player of the opening. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 33, since the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the open / close execution mode, the MPU 102 is centered on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. 33 (E). By displaying the line of the angel that exists in "Probability change rush!", The player is notified that the mode has been changed to the high probability mode. After that, as shown in FIG. 33 (F), the MPU 102 displays the line of the angel existing in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, "The next jackpot is left-handed to confirm 16R!". , Notifies the player of the opening of the non-electric accessory 51.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a display screen of a symbol display device, a non-electric accessory, and a right-side variable ball entry mechanism when the non-electric accessory is switched to the open / close execution mode when the non-electric accessory is opened. Note that FIG. 34 is a simplified diagram of the non-electric accessory 51 at the lower left of the display screen G.
Specifically, FIG. 34 (A) is a diagram showing a display screen G at the time of transition to the open / close execution mode. 34 (B) and 34 (C) are views showing a display screen G when a ball enters the non-electric accessory 51.

When the non-electric accessory 51 shifts to the open / close execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is opened, the MPU 102 reduces each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 to display the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. 34 (A). It is arranged at the lower left position of, and the variation display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is stopped.
Here, when the non-electric accessory 51 shifts to the open / close execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is opened, the MPU 92 determines in step S1604 that the open command has been received. Therefore, in step S1605, the opening effect is determined. The process is executed, and in step S1606, a command for opening effect related to the opening effect determined in the process of determining the opening effect in step S1605 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the opening effect based on the opening effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 suggests that the player hits the left by displaying the line of the angel "16R confirmed by hitting the left!" Existing in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. ..

Further, the MPU 62 executes the crune route setting process in step S1005. In this crune route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the closed state and sets the right variable entry mechanism 52 to the crune route by executing the drive control of the plate drive unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Here, since the blade member 521a is intermittently opened and closed at a cycle of 2 seconds, when the blade member 521a is set to the open state by the blade member driving unit 521c, the game ball tilts the blade member 521a. The ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 through the blade member 521a. Further, when the plate 523a is set to the closed state and set to the crune route, the game ball that reaches the branch position of the guide passage 522 after entering the right variable entry mechanism 52 is the guide rail 525. Will be guided to. After that, the game ball is guided to the crune 53 via the guide rail 525.
After that, the game ball guided to the crune 53 via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532, and then enters any of the holes 533A to 533C.
When a ball enters each of the holes 533A to 533C, the pachinko machine 10 executes the same process as in the case of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory is not opened.

When a ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 (16-round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines that the 16-round execution command has been received in step S1610. Therefore, 16-round execution is performed in step S1611. The effect determination process is executed, and in step S1612, a 16-round execution effect command related to the 16-round execution effect determined in the 16-round execution effect determination process of step S1611 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 16-round execution effect based on the 16-round execution effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34 (B), the MPU 102 displays the angel line "16R confirmed! Right-handed!" Existing in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Notify the player that the execution of 16 round games will be started. Further, the game ball that has entered the non-electric accessory 51 through the entrance of the passage 511B shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the open state to the closed state.

Further, the MPU 62 executes the discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this discharge route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state and sets the right variable entry mechanism 52 to the discharge route by executing the drive control of the plate drive unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

After that, the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S1510. Therefore, in step S1511, the type of the game result is determined based on the content of the opening command, and the game result determined in step S1511 is determined. Executes the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode corresponding to the type. In the example of FIG. 34, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result, so that the MPU 92 is displayed. , It is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Further, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is 16 times, the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the open / close execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

After finishing the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S1514. Therefore, in step S1515, the opening determination process of the non-electric accessory is executed. When a ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 (16-round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electric accessory 51 is not open, so that the non-electric accessory 51 is used as an ending effect. Select a normal effect that does not notify the player of the opening of 51. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 34, since the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the open / close execution mode, the MPU 102 is centered on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. 34 (C). By displaying the line of the angel that exists in "Probability change rush!", The player is notified that the mode has been changed to the high probability mode.

Here, in the present embodiment, the starting ball entering means includes an upper operating port 36 (first starting ball entering portion) and a lower operating port 37 (second starting ball entering portion).
Further, the pachinko machine 10 has a left-handed route (first route) in which the game ball is likely to enter the upper operating port 36 and is less likely to be generated in the lower operating port 37, and a lower route. It is provided with a right-handed route (second route) in which it is easy to generate a game ball into the operating port 37 and it is difficult to generate a game ball entering the upper operating port 36. The non-electric accessory 51 is arranged on the left-handed route.

Further, the main control device 60 has a low frequency support mode (first gaming state) in which the probability of entering the lower operating port 37 is lower than that of the upper operating port 36, and the main control device 60 is placed in the lower operating port 37 rather than the upper operating port 36. It is provided with a high-frequency support mode (second game state) in which the probability of entering a ball is high, and functions as a game state switching unit for switching between a low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode.
Specifically, the main control device 60 switches from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode after finishing the game in the open / close execution mode. Then, when the game result is "explicit small round high probability result" or "most advantageous result", the main control device 60 continues the high frequency support mode at least until it becomes "big hit winning" in the winning or losing lottery. .. Further, when the game result is "low probability result", the main control device 60 executes the game times (internal lottery) a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), and then starts from the high frequency support mode. Switch to low frequency support mode.

Therefore, if the game result is "explicit small round high probability result" or "most advantageous result", the player will be "big hit winner" at least in the winning / losing lottery after finishing the game in the open / close execution mode. Up to this point, the game round can be executed by inserting the game ball into the lower operating port 37 via the right-handed route. According to this, the player can maintain the open state of the non-electric accessory 51 at least until the "big hit win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

On the other hand, when the game result is "low probability result", the player finishes the game in the open / close execution mode and then executes the game 100 times (from the high frequency support mode). By letting the game ball enter the lower operating port 37 via the right-handed route (until it is switched to the low-frequency support mode), the game times can be executed. After that, since it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the lower operating port 37 via the right-handed route, the player can play the game by inserting the game ball into the upper operating port 36 via the left-handed route. Can be executed. Therefore, when the non-electric accessory 51 is arranged on the left-handed route, the player shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state, and then executes 100 game times. In addition, if the game state is not shifted to the open / close execution mode, the game ball will be inserted into the non-electric accessory 51 via the left-handed route. In this case, the non-electric accessory 51 shifts from the open state to the closed state, so that the player puts the game state into the open / close execution mode by the time the game is executed 100 times. You can play the game with the expectation that it will be transferred.

In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets a high-frequency support mode with no limit on the number of times and a high-frequency support mode with a limit of 100 times, so that the pachinko machine 10 has an advantageous gaming state and a disadvantageous gaming state for the player. Although the state has been created, by setting a gaming state other than these, a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player may be created. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by changing the number of game times in which the high-frequency support mode is continued after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, depending on whether or not the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by changing the number of game times in which the high-probability mode is continued after the opening / closing execution mode ends. ..

Here, when the non-electric accessory 51 shifts to the open / close execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is opened, the player causes the ball to enter each of the holes 533A to 533C of the crune 53, or enters the non-electric accessory 51. You can choose whether to generate a sphere.
Therefore, for example, when the player shifts to the open / close execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is opened and the game result is the "explicit small round high probability result" or the "most advantageous result", the croon 53 By aiming to enter the 16-round execution gate or the 4-round execution gate, the high-probability mode can be continued while maintaining the open state of the non-electric accessory 51. After that, the player shifts to the open / close execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is opened, and when the game result is a "low probability result", the player aims to enter the non-electric accessory 51. Since the non-electric accessory 51 can be shifted from the open state to the closed state, the player executes 100 game times after shifting the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state. If the game state is not shifted to the open / close execution mode by the time, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball is inserted into the non-electric accessory 51 via the left-handed route. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the choices of the player and can improve the player's attention to the game.

In the present embodiment, the reversing ball entry means has shifted from the open state to the closed state triggered by the entry of one game ball, but is opened when two or more game balls enter. It may transition from a state to a closed state.
When the inverted ball entering means is configured in this way, for example, the player maintains the open state of the inverted ball entering means even after the first game ball is inserted into the inverted ball entering means. Therefore, the order of aiming at the round game execution gate can be diversified. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can further expand the options of the player, and can further improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

According to such an embodiment, the following actions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 temporarily enters a game ball flowing down the game area based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. A croon 53 that enables a ball is provided, and since the croon 53 is provided with holes 533A to 533C for starting a game in the open / close execution mode when the game ball enters the ball, the player is in a game state with the main control device 60. After shifting to the open / close execution mode, the game in the open / close execution mode can be started by inserting the game ball into each of the holes 533A to 533C. Further, since the hole 533A shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters the ball, the player sets the game state to the next open / close execution mode by the main control device 60. After the transition, the game in the open / close execution mode can be started by inserting the game ball into the non-electric accessory 51. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the options of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.

(2) The opening / closing execution mode game that starts when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A is larger than the opening / closing execution mode game that starts when the game ball enters the holes 533B and 533C. Since a high value is given to the player, the player expects the ball to enter the hole 533A when starting the game in the open / close execution mode by letting the crune 53 enter the game ball. .. Further, when the non-electric accessory 51 is shifted from the closed state to the open state triggered by the entry of the game ball into the hole 533A, the player opens and closes the game state next time with the main control device 60. By inserting the game ball into the non-electric accessory 51 after shifting to the execution mode, the player is given a higher value than the game in the open / close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters each of the holes 533B and 533C. It is possible to start the game of the opening / closing execution mode to be given. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the options of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.

(3) The entry of the game ball into each of the holes 533B and 533C can start the game in the open / close execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the non-electric accessory 51 and the game ball into the hole 533A can be started. The entry is from the opening / closing execution mode game that starts when the game balls enter the holes 533B and 533C by starting the opening / closing execution mode game in which more game balls can be paid out than the predetermined number of game balls. Since it also gives the player a high value, the player expects the ball to enter the hole 533A when starting the game in the open / close execution mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the game.

(4) The game state transition process is an opening / closing execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of times of opening / closing of the variable winning device 38 to a predetermined number when the game balls enter the holes 533B and 533C. By setting the number of times of opening and closing of the variable winning device 38 to be larger than the predetermined number of times when the game is started and the game ball is entered into the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A, the number of times of opening and closing is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. Since the game in the open / close execution mode in which the game ball can be paid out is started, the player expects the ball to enter the hole 533A when starting the game in the open / close execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(5) Since each of the holes 533A to 533C is provided on the rolling surface 531 of the crune 53, the player pays attention to the whereabouts of the game ball that has entered the crune 53. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(6) The non-electric accessory 51 shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball at each plate-shaped body 513, and is closed by receiving the game ball at each lower blade member 515. Since the state shifts from to the open state, the open / closed state can be shifted using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other power such as electric power.

(7) After the player finishes the game in the open / close execution mode, the player goes down via the right-handed route until the game is executed 100 times (until the high frequency support mode is switched to the low frequency support mode). By inserting the game ball into the operating port 37, the game times can be executed. After that, since it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the lower operating port 37 via the right-handed route, the player can play the game by inserting the game ball into the upper operating port 36 via the left-handed route. Can be executed. Therefore, when the non-electric accessory 51 is arranged on the left-handed route, the player shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state, and then executes 100 game times. In addition, if the game state is not shifted to the open / close execution mode, the game ball will be inserted into the non-electric accessory 51 via the left-handed route. In this case, the non-electric accessory 51 shifts from the open state to the closed state, so that the player puts the game state into the open / close execution mode by the time the game is executed 100 times. You can play the game with the expectation that it will be transferred.

[Second Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts already described will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 35 is a front view of the game board according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 includes a crune 53 provided in the area on the left side of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, enters the hole 533A of the crune 53, falls downward, and passes through the connecting passage 535. The game ball guided to the non-electric accessory 51 via the non-electric accessory 51 shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state. In other words, in the first embodiment, the game ball that has entered the hole 533A of the crune 53 is always guided by the non-electric accessory 51.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game board 31 includes a crune 53A provided in the area on the left side of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, and the game ball entering the hole 533A of the crune 53A is not necessarily electric. It differs from the first embodiment in that it is not guided by the accessory 51.

FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the vicinity of the crune enlarged and viewed from an obliquely upper side.
As shown in FIG. 36, the crune 53A is provided along a disk-shaped rolling surface 531 for rolling a game ball guided to the croon 53A via a guide rail 525, and a peripheral edge of the rolling surface 531. A side wall 532, a columnar rotating body 537 arranged below the rolling surface 531 and rotatably provided around the central axis, and a saucer 538 arranged below the rotating body 537 are provided. There is.
The guide rail 525 guides the game ball to the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532.

The rolling surface 531 is formed with three holes 533A to 533C formed at a predetermined distance from the center thereof and at equal intervals from each other, and holes 533A to 533C formed at the center thereof. It is provided with a protrusion 534 having three side surfaces that incline so as to descend toward the 533C side. Further, the rolling surface 531 is inclined so as to descend from the side wall 532 side toward each hole 533A to 533C side (see FIG. 4).
Therefore, the game ball guided to the crune 53A via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532 and then enters any of the holes 533A to 533C (FIG. FIG. See middle arrow A).

Each of the holes 533A to 533C includes detection sensors 40i to 40k (see FIG. 11) for detecting the entry of a game ball, and the detection sensors 40i to 40k are arranged on the back side of the game board 31. Specifically, the detection sensor 40i detects the entry of the game ball into the hole 533A, the detection sensor 40j detects the entry of the game ball into the hole 533B, and the detection sensor 40k enters the hole 533C. Detects the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 10 does not pay out the prize balls when the balls enter the holes 533A to 533C, unlike the case where the balls enter the various winning openings. Further, the detection sensors 40i to 40k may be any as long as they can individually detect the winning of the game ball, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor or the like can be adopted.

Each of the holes 533A to 533C wins the transition to the open / close execution mode in the internal lottery, and when the transition to the open / close execution mode is performed, it is an opportunity to start the round game. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 wins the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in the internal lottery, and after the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, when a ball enters each of the holes 533A to 533C, the opening / closing door 38b Is set to the open state, and execution of a predetermined number of round games is started.

Specifically, when the pachinko machine 10 enters the hole 533A, the pachinko machine 10 starts executing the 16 round games. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 starts executing the 16 round games in the hole 533A. A mark is displayed around the hole 533A to suggest that.
Further, since the pachinko machine 10 starts executing the four round games when the ball enters the holes 533B and 533C, the pachinko machine 10 starts executing the four round games in the holes 533B and 533C. The mark is not displayed to suggest that it should be done.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the crune 53A flows down the game area based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. Functions as a variable ball entry means that allows the ball to enter temporarily.
Further, the crune 53A is provided with holes 533A to 533C (a plurality of ball entry portions) for inserting a game ball that has entered the crune 53A. The crune 53A has a rolling surface 531 that rolls a game ball that has entered the croon 53A, and a plurality of ball entry portions are provided on the rolling surface 531 and a game that rolls the rolling surface 531. Let the ball enter. Specifically, the rolling surface 531 is formed at a predetermined distance from the center of the rolling surface 531 and includes a plurality of ball entry portions provided at equal intervals from each other.

In the present embodiment, the plurality of ball entry portions are provided on the rolling surface 531 of the crune 53A, and a game ball that rolls on the rolling surface 531 is inserted. On the other hand, the plurality of ball entry units may be provided in, for example, a distribution mechanism that distributes the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means to any of the plurality of ball entry units. In this case, the probabilities of distributing the game ball to any of the plurality of ball entry portions by the distribution mechanism may be the same or different. In short, the variable ball entry means may include a plurality of ball entry portions.
Further, in the present embodiment, the variable ball entry means includes a plurality of ball entry sections, but the variable ball entry means may include one ball entry section.

Here, as described above, the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A (second ball entry portion) are 16-round execution gates that start execution of 16 round games. Further, the holes 533B and 533C (first ball entry portions) are four-round execution gates that start execution of four round games. Therefore, the game in the open / close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A is higher than the game in the open / close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the holes 533B and 533C. It gives value to the player.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 sets the number of times of opening and closing of the variable winning device 38 to a predetermined number of times (4 times in the present embodiment) when the game ball enters each of the holes 533B and 533C. When the game in the open / close execution mode in which the game ball can be paid out is started and the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A, the variable winning device 38 is opened / closed more times than a predetermined number (in the present embodiment). By setting (16 times), a game in an open / close execution mode in which more game balls than a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out is started.

In the present embodiment, the opening / closing execution mode game that starts when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A is performed by setting the number of opening / closing times of the variable winning device 38, respectively, for the holes 533B and 533C. The player is given a higher value than the game in the open / close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the ball, but for example, by setting the opening time of the variable winning device 38, each hole 533B, 533C The player may be given a higher value than the game in the open / close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the ball. In short, the game of the open / close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the second ball entry portion and the reverse ball entry means is the open / close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the first ball entry portion. It suffices to give the player a higher value than the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the holes 533A are used as 16-round execution gates for starting the execution of 16 round games, and the holes 533B and 533C are used as 4-round execution gates for starting the execution of 4 round games. The correspondence between 533A to 533C and the 16-round execution gate and the 4-round execution gate was fixed. On the other hand, the correspondence between the holes 533A to 533C and the 16-round execution gate and the 4-round execution gate does not have to be fixed. For example, the correspondence is changed based on the result of the internal lottery. You may. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the game playability and can improve the player's attention to the game.

The rotating body 537 is formed in a circular shape on the upper surface thereof, and the upper openings 537A1 to 537A3 formed at positions corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C, and the upper openings 537A1 formed in a circular shape on the lower surface thereof. It is provided with lower openings 537B1 to 537B3 communicating with ~ 537A3.
The lower opening 537B1 is opened so as to be concentric with the central axis of the rotating body 537. After rolling the rolling surface 531, the game ball enters any of the holes 533A to 533C and falls downward, and the game ball entering the upper opening 537A1 is a rotating body formed inside the rotating body 537. It will be discharged from the lower opening 537B1 through the passage 537C1 (see arrow B1 in the figure).

The lower opening 537B2 opens directly below the upper opening 537A2. After rolling the rolling surface 531, the game ball enters any of the holes 533A to 533C and falls downward, and the game ball entering the upper opening 537A2 is a rotating body formed inside the rotating body 537. It will be discharged from the lower opening 537B2 through the passage 537C2 (see arrow B2 in the figure).
The lower opening 537B3 opens directly below the upper opening 537A3. After rolling the rolling surface 531, the game ball enters any of the holes 533A to 533C and falls downward, and the game ball entering the upper opening 537A3 is a rotating body formed inside the rotating body 537. It will be discharged from the lower opening 537B3 through the passage 537C3 (see arrow B3 in the figure).

The saucer 538 has a disk-shaped rolling surface 538A that rolls a game ball that has been discharged from the lower opening 537B2 or a lower opening 537B3 and has fallen downward, and a side wall 538B provided along the peripheral edge of the rolling surface 538A. I have.
The rolling surface 538A includes a cylindrical tubular portion 538A1 formed concentrically at its central position. The tubular portion 538A1 guides the game ball discharged from the lower opening 537B1 to the connecting passage 538C. The connecting passage 538C guides the game ball to the non-electric accessory 51 in the same manner as the connecting passage 535 in the first embodiment (see arrow C in the figure).
The side wall 538B includes a rectangular opening 538B1 formed laterally. The opening 538B1 guides the game ball discharged from the lower opening 537B2 or the lower opening 537B3 to the discharge passage 538D. The discharge passage 538D discharges the game ball into the game area through the opening 311 (see FIG. 35) in the same manner as the discharge passage 536 in the first embodiment.

Here, the rolling surface 538A is inclined so as to descend toward the opening 538B1 side.
Therefore, the game ball discharged from the lower opening 537B2 or the lower opening 537B3 is guided to the discharge passage 538D through the opening 538B1 after rolling on the rolling surface 538A (see arrow D in the figure). ..

Further, the rotating body 537 is formed on a lower surface thereof, a circular groove portion 537D formed so as to be concentric with the central axis of the rotating body 537, and a gear formed on the peripheral surface thereof (not shown). And a rotating body driving unit 537E (see FIG. 37) that rotates the rotating body 537 via this gear.
The groove 537D is aligned with the side wall 538B of the saucer 538 to mount the rotating body 537 on the saucer 538 and positions the rotating body 537 with respect to the saucer 538.
The rotating body driving unit 537E rotates the rotating body 537 at a predetermined rotation speed via a gear formed on the peripheral surface of the rotating body 537.
In the present embodiment, the rotating body driving unit 537E rotates the rotating body 537 at a predetermined rotation speed, but the rotation speed may be changed.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 37 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 37, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a voice emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a payout control device 70 that executes payout control that causes the above-mentioned payout device 71 to pay out the game balls, and a power supply that executes launch control that causes the above-mentioned game ball launch mechanism 81 to launch the game balls. A launch control device 80 is provided, and these devices are mounted on a back pack unit.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control (main control) of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. The main control device 60 includes a board box for accommodating the main control board 61 and the like. The substrate box may be provided with a trace means that leaves a trace when the substrate box is opened, or may be provided with a trace structure that leaves a trace when the substrate box is opened. Specifically, as a trace means, a substrate box is formed by connecting a plurality of case bodies, and a connecting portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined portion when separating each case body is provided or peeled off. At this time, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of peeling due to the adhesive layer remaining on the bonding target is attached so as to straddle the boundary between the plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between these case bodies can be adopted.

The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61, and a ROM 63 and a RAM 64 constituting the MPU 62. Here, the MPU 62 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, and the like are combined into a chip in addition to the ROM 63 and the RAM 64.
In the present embodiment, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 62, but they may be individually chipped. This also applies to MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 60.

The ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply for holding the stored information. The ROM 63 has various areas such as a pass / fail table storage area 63a, a distribution table storage area 63b, and a reach table storage area 63c. These areas will be described in detail later.
The RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a control program stored in the ROM 63, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply for holding the stored information. Is. The RAM 64 has various areas such as various counter areas 64a, a holding ball storage area 64b, and an electric service holding area 64c. These areas will be described in detail later.

The MPU 62 includes an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 62 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 65 provided in the main control device 60, a plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40k, and a non-electric accessory open detection sensor 519. The output port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, the payout control device 70, and the voice emission control device 90. Further, the output port of the MPU 62 includes an electric accessory drive unit 37b for opening and closing the electric accessory 37a of the lower operating port 37, a variable winning drive unit 38c for opening and closing the opening / closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38, and a blade member. Rotation that rotates the rotating body 537 at a predetermined rotation speed via a blade member driving unit 521c that opens and closes the 521a, a plate driving unit 523c that opens and closes the plate 523a, and a gear formed on the peripheral surface of the rotating body 537. It is connected to the body drive unit 537E, the main display unit 45, and the accessory display unit 46.

The main control board 61 has a driver circuit. The MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric service open state, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b to open and close the electric accessory drive 37a. Further, in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 38c to open / close the large winning opening 38a. Further, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the blade member driving unit 521c to open and close the blade member 521a. Further, in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the plate drive unit 523c to open / close the plate 523a. Further, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the rotating body driving unit 537E to rotate the rotating body 537. Further, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the main display unit 45 and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the respective operating ports 36 and 37. Further, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the accessory display unit 46 and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41.

<About the flow when shifting to the open / close execution mode>
FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a display screen of a symbol display device, a non-electric accessory, and a right-side variable ball entry mechanism when the opening / closing execution mode is entered when the non-electric accessory is not opened. Note that FIG. 38 shows a simplified non-electric accessory 51 at the lower left of the display screen G.
Specifically, FIG. 38A is a diagram showing a display screen G at the time of transition to the open / close execution mode. FIGS. 38 (B) and 38 (C) are views showing a non-electric accessory 51 that has not been opened after the ball has entered the 4-round execution gate. 38 (D) and 38 (E) are views showing a non-electric accessory 51 that has been opened after the ball has entered the four-round execution gate. FIG. 38F is a diagram showing a display screen G when the opening notification effect for notifying the player of the opening of the non-electric accessory 51 is selected as the ending effect.

When the non-electric accessory 51 shifts to the open / close execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 102 reduces each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 to display the display screen of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. 38 (A). It is arranged at the lower left position of G, and the variation display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is stopped.
Here, when the non-electric accessory 51 shifts to the open / close execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 92 determines in step S1601 that the non-opening command has been received. The effect determination process is executed, and in step S1603, a non-opening effect command related to the non-opening effect determined in the non-opening effect determination process of step S1602 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the non-opening effect based on the non-opening effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 tells the player to hit right by displaying the angel's line "Aim for the crune by hitting right!" Existing in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Suggest.

Further, the MPU 62 executes the crune route setting process in step S1005. In this crune route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the closed state and sets the right variable entry mechanism 52 to the crune route by executing the drive control of the plate drive unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Here, since the blade member 521a is intermittently opened and closed at a cycle of 2 seconds, when the blade member 521a is set to the open state by the blade member driving unit 521c, the game ball tilts the blade member 521a. The ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 through the blade member 521a. Further, when the plate 523a is set to the closed state and set to the crune route, the game ball that reaches the branch position of the guide passage 522 after entering the right variable entry mechanism 52 is the guide rail 525. Will be guided to. After that, the game ball is guided to the crune 53 via the guide rail 525.
After that, the game ball guided to the crune 53 via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532, and then enters any of the holes 533A to 533C.

When a ball enters the holes 533B and 533C (four-round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines that the four-round execution command has been received in step S1607. In step S1609, the command for the 4-round execution effect related to the 4-round execution effect determined in the determination process of the 4-round execution effect in step S1608 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 4-round execution effect based on the 4-round execution effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 38 (B) and 38 (D), the MPU 102 has an angel line "4R confirmed! Right-handed!" Presenting in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Is displayed to notify the player that the execution of the four round games is started.

Further, the MPU 62 executes the discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this discharge route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state and sets the right variable entry mechanism 52 to the discharge route by executing the drive control of the plate drive unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

FIG. 39 is a perspective view showing a flow in which the game ball is guided to the discharge passage after the ball enters the four-round execution gate.
When the ball enters the holes 533B and 533C (four-round execution gate), the game ball falls to the saucer 538 through any of the rotating body passages 537C1 to 537C3 of the rotating body 537. ..
For example, when a ball enters the hole 533C, the game ball comes into contact with the upper surface of the rotating body 537 and stops, as shown in FIG. 39 (A).

Here, since the rotating body driving unit 537E rotates the rotating body 537 at a predetermined rotation speed via a gear formed on the peripheral surface of the rotating body 537 (see arrow R in the figure), the hole 533C is formed. It communicates with any of the rotating body passages 537C1 to 537C3 of the rotating body 537.
For example, when a ball enters the hole 533C, comes into contact with the upper surface of the rotating body 537, stops, and then communicates with the rotating body passage 537C2, the game ball becomes as shown in FIG. 39 (B). After rolling the rolling surface 538A of the saucer 538, it is guided to the discharge passage 538D through the opening 538B1 (see the arrow in the figure). The discharge passage 538D discharges the game ball into the game area through the opening 311 (see FIG. 35).

After that, the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S1510. Therefore, in step S1511, the type of the game result is determined based on the content of the opening command, and the game result determined in step S1511 is determined. Executes the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode corresponding to the type. In the example of FIG. 38, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result, so that the MPU 92 is displayed. , It is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Further, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is four, the effect C1 is selected as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the open / close execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

After finishing the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S1514. Therefore, in step S1515, the opening determination process of the non-electric accessory is executed. When the game ball is discharged to the game area in the discharge passage 538D, the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electric accessory 51 is not open, so that the non-electric accessory 51 is opened as an ending effect. Select a normal production that does not notify the person. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 38, since the effect C1 is selected as the effect for the open / close execution mode, the MPU 102 is centered on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. 38 (C). By displaying the line of the angel that exists in "Probability change rush!", The player is notified that the mode has been changed to the high probability mode.

FIG. 40 is a perspective view showing a flow in which the game ball is guided to the connecting passage after the ball enters the four-round execution gate.
Further, for example, when a ball enters the hole 533C, the game ball comes into contact with the upper surface of the rotating body 537 and stops, as shown in FIG. 40 (A).

Here, since the rotating body driving unit 537E rotates the rotating body 537 at a predetermined rotation speed via a gear formed on the peripheral surface of the rotating body 537 (see arrow R in the figure), the hole 533C is formed. It communicates with any of the rotating body passages 537C1 to 537C3 of the rotating body 537.
For example, when a ball enters the hole 533C, comes into contact with the upper surface of the rotating body 537, stops, and then communicates with the rotating body passage 537C1, the game ball becomes as shown in FIG. 40 (B). It will be guided to the connecting passage 538C via the tubular portion 538A1 (see the arrow in the figure). The connecting passage 538C guides the game ball to the non-electric accessory 51. After that, the game ball guided to the non-electric accessory 51 via the connecting passage 538C shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state.

After that, the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S1510. Therefore, in step S1511, the type of the game result is determined based on the content of the opening command, and the game result determined in step S1511 is determined. Executes the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode corresponding to the type. In the example of FIG. 38, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result, so that the MPU 92 is displayed. , It is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Further, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is four, the effect C1 is selected as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the open / close execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

After finishing the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S1514. Therefore, in step S1515, the opening determination process of the non-electric accessory is executed. When the game ball is guided to the non-electric accessory 51 in the connecting passage 538C, the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electric accessory 51 is open, so that the non-electric accessory 51 is used as an ending effect. Select the opening notification effect that notifies the player of the opening of. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 38, since the effect C1 is selected as the effect for the open / close execution mode, the MPU 102 is centered on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. 38 (E). By displaying the line of the angel that exists in "Probability change rush!", The player is notified that the mode has been changed to the high probability mode. After that, as shown in FIG. 38 (F), the MPU 102 displays the line of the angel existing in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, "The next jackpot is left-handed to confirm 16R!". , Notifies the player of the opening of the non-electric accessory 51.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the ball enters each of the holes 533A to 533C, the game ball comes into contact with the upper surface of the rotating body 537 and stops. Then, the game ball waits without entering the holes 533A to 533C until the holes 533A to 533C and the rotating body passages 537C to 537C3 of the rotating body 537 communicate with each other. In other words, the game ball does not enter until the holes 533A to 533C and the rotating body passages 537C1 to 537C3 of the rotating body 537 communicate with each other.

Here, when the non-electric accessory 51 shifts to the open / close execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is opened, the player causes the ball to enter each of the holes 533A to 533C of the crune 53, or enters the non-electric accessory 51. You can choose whether to generate a sphere.
Therefore, if the non-electric accessory 51 shifts to the open / close execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is opened, for example, the player can first aim to enter the 16-round execution gate of the Kroon 53, and as a result, 16 rounds. If the player is waiting to enter the 4-round execution gate instead of the execution gate, he / she can further aim to enter the non-electric accessory 51. Then, if it is possible to generate a ball entering the non-electric accessory 51 while waiting for the ball to enter the 4-round execution gate of the Kroon 53, the execution of 16 round games can be started. .. According to this, the player can switch which round game execution gate to aim at depending on the situation, and can improve the player's attention to the game.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a display screen of a symbol display device, a non-electric accessory, and a right-side variable ball entry mechanism when the non-electric accessory is shifted to the open / close execution mode when the non-electric accessory is not opened. Note that FIG. 41 shows a simplified non-electric accessory 51 at the lower left of the display screen G.
Specifically, FIG. 41 (A) is a diagram showing a display screen G at the time of transition to the open / close execution mode. 41 (B) and 41 (C) are views showing a non-electric accessory 51 that has not been opened after the ball has entered the 16-round execution gate. 41 (D) and 41 (E) are views showing the non-electric accessory 51 which is in the open state after the ball enters the 16-round execution gate. FIG. 41 (F) is a diagram showing a display screen G when the opening notification effect for notifying the player of the opening of the non-electric accessory 51 is selected as the ending effect.

When the non-electric accessory 51 shifts to the open / close execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 102 reduces each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 to display the display screen of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. 41 (A). It is arranged at the lower left position of G, and the variation display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is stopped.
Here, when the non-electric accessory 51 shifts to the open / close execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 92 determines in step S1601 that the non-opening command has been received. The effect determination process is executed, and in step S1603, a non-opening effect command related to the non-opening effect determined in the non-opening effect determination process of step S1602 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the non-opening effect based on the non-opening effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 tells the player to hit right by displaying the angel's line "Aim for the crune by hitting right!" Existing in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Suggest.

Further, the MPU 62 executes the crune route setting process in step S1005. In this crune route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the closed state and sets the right variable entry mechanism 52 to the crune route by executing the drive control of the plate drive unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Here, since the blade member 521a is intermittently opened and closed at a cycle of 2 seconds, when the blade member 521a is set to the open state by the blade member driving unit 521c, the game ball tilts the blade member 521a. The ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 through the blade member 521a. Further, when the plate 523a is set to the closed state and set to the crune route, the game ball that reaches the branch position of the guide passage 522 after entering the right variable entry mechanism 52 is the guide rail 525. Will be guided to. After that, the game ball is guided to the crune 53 via the guide rail 525.
After that, the game ball guided to the crune 53 via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532, and then enters any of the holes 533A to 533C.

When the ball enters the hole 533A (16-round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines that the 16-round execution command has been received in step S1610. Therefore, in step S1611, the 16-round execution effect is determined. The process is executed, and in step S1612, a command for 16-round execution effect related to the 16-round execution effect determined in the determination process of 16-round execution effect in step S1611 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 16-round execution effect based on the 16-round execution effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 41 (B) and 41 (D), the MPU 102 has an angel line "16R confirmed! Right-handed!" Presenting in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Is displayed to notify the player that the execution of 16 round games is to be started.

Further, the MPU 62 executes the discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this discharge route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state and sets the right variable entry mechanism 52 to the discharge route by executing the drive control of the plate drive unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

FIG. 42 is a perspective view showing a flow in which the game ball is guided to the discharge passage after the ball enters the 16-round execution gate.
When the ball enters the hole 533A (16 round execution gate), the game ball falls to the saucer 538 through any of the rotating body passages 537C1 to 537C3 of the rotating body 537.
When the ball enters the hole 533A, the game ball comes into contact with the upper surface of the rotating body 537 and stops, as shown in FIG. 42 (A).

Here, since the rotating body driving unit 537E rotates the rotating body 537 at a predetermined rotation speed via a gear formed on the peripheral surface of the rotating body 537 (see arrow R in the figure), the hole 533C is formed. It communicates with any of the rotating body passages 537C1 to 537C3 of the rotating body 537.
For example, when a ball enters the hole 533A, comes into contact with the upper surface of the rotating body 537, stops, and then communicates with the rotating body passage 537C2, the game ball becomes as shown in FIG. 42 (B). After rolling the rolling surface 538A of the saucer 538, it is guided to the discharge passage 538D through the opening 538B1 (see the arrow in the figure). The discharge passage 538D discharges the game ball into the game area through the opening 311 (see FIG. 35).

After that, the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S1510. Therefore, in step S1511, the type of the game result is determined based on the content of the opening command, and the game result determined in step S1511 is determined. Executes the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode corresponding to the type. In the example of FIG. 41, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result, so that the MPU 92 is displayed. , It is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Further, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is 16 times, the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the open / close execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

After finishing the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S1514. Therefore, in step S1515, the opening determination process of the non-electric accessory is executed. When the game ball is discharged to the game area in the discharge passage 538D, the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electric accessory 51 is not open, so that the non-electric accessory 51 is opened as an ending effect. Select a normal production that does not notify the person. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 41, since the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the open / close execution mode, the MPU 102 is centered on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. 41 (C). By displaying the line of the angel that exists in "Probability change rush!", The player is notified that the mode has been changed to the high probability mode.

FIG. 43 is a perspective view showing a flow in which the game ball is guided to the connecting passage after the ball enters the 16-round execution gate.
Further, when the ball enters the hole 533A, the game ball comes into contact with the upper surface of the rotating body 537 and stops, as shown in FIG. 43 (A).

Here, since the rotating body driving unit 537E rotates the rotating body 537 at a predetermined rotation speed via a gear formed on the peripheral surface of the rotating body 537 (see arrow R in the figure), the hole 533A is formed. It communicates with any of the rotating body passages 537C1 to 537C3 of the rotating body 537.
For example, when a ball enters the hole 533A, comes into contact with the upper surface of the rotating body 537, stops, and then communicates with the rotating body passage 537C1, the game ball becomes as shown in FIG. 43 (B). It will be guided to the connecting passage 538C via the tubular portion 538A1 (see the arrow in the figure). The connecting passage 538C guides the game ball to the non-electric accessory 51. After that, the game ball guided to the non-electric accessory 51 via the connecting passage 538C shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state.

After that, the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S1510. Therefore, in step S1511, the type of the game result is determined based on the content of the opening command, and the game result determined in step S1511 is determined. Executes the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode corresponding to the type. In the present embodiment, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result, so that the MPU 92 displays the stop. It is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Further, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is 16 times, the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the open / close execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

After finishing the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S1514. Therefore, in step S1515, the opening determination process of the non-electric accessory is executed. When the game ball is guided to the non-electric accessory 51 in the connecting passage 538C, the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electric accessory 51 is open, so that the non-electric accessory 51 is used as an ending effect. Select the opening notification effect that notifies the player of the opening of. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 41, since the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the open / close execution mode, the MPU 102 is centered on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. 41 (E). By displaying the line of the angel that exists in "Probability change rush!", The player is notified that the mode has been changed to the high probability mode. After that, as shown in FIG. 41 (F), the MPU 102 displays the line of the angel existing in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, "The next jackpot is left-handed to confirm 16R!". , Notifies the player of the opening of the non-electric accessory 51.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the rotating body 537 rotates about the axis passing through the center of the rolling surface 531 as the central axis, and the game balls that have entered the holes 533A to 533C are inserted. Further, the rotating body 537 is formed at a position corresponding to each of the holes 533A to 533C, and includes a plurality of rotating body passages 537C1 to 537C3 for guiding the game ball entering the holes 533A to 533C. .. The plurality of rotating body passages 537C1 to 537C3 are a rotating body passage 537C2 and a rotating body passage 537C3 (first rotating body) that do not shift the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters the ball. A passage) and a rotating body passage 537C1 (second rotating body passage) that shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters the ball. Therefore, the rotating body 537 and the saucer 538 serve as an opening / closing lottery unit for drawing whether or not to shift the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters each of the holes 533A to 533C. It is functioning.

In the present embodiment, the rotating body 537 and the saucer 538 are used as the opening / closing lottery section, but the counter is similar to the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37, for example. You may adopt the lottery using. In short, what kind of lottery is the opening / closing lottery section if it is possible to draw a lottery as to whether or not to shift the reversing ball entry means from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters the entry section. You may.

Here, in the present embodiment, the starting ball entering means includes an upper operating port 36 (first starting ball entering portion) and a lower operating port 37 (second starting ball entering portion).
Further, the pachinko machine 10 has a left-handed route (first route) in which the game ball is likely to enter the upper operating port 36 and is less likely to be generated in the lower operating port 37, and a lower route. It is provided with a right-handed route (second route) in which it is easy to generate a game ball into the operating port 37 and it is difficult to generate a game ball entering the upper operating port 36. The non-electric accessory 51 is arranged on the left-handed route.

Further, the main control device 60 has a low frequency support mode (first gaming state) in which the probability of entering the lower operating port 37 is lower than that of the upper operating port 36, and the main control device 60 is placed in the lower operating port 37 rather than the upper operating port 36. It is provided with a high-frequency support mode (second game state) in which the probability of entering a ball is high, and functions as a game state switching unit for switching between a low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode.
Specifically, the main control device 60 switches from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode after finishing the game in the open / close execution mode. Then, when the game result is "explicit small round high probability result" or "most advantageous result", the main control device 60 continues the high frequency support mode at least until it becomes "big hit winning" in the winning or losing lottery. .. Further, when the game result is "low probability result", the main control device 60 executes the game times (internal lottery) a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), and then starts from the high frequency support mode. Switch to low frequency support mode.

Therefore, if the game result is "explicit small round high probability result" or "most advantageous result", the player will be "big hit winner" at least in the winning / losing lottery after finishing the game in the open / close execution mode. Up to this point, the game round can be executed by inserting the game ball into the lower operating port 37 via the right-handed route. According to this, the player can maintain the open state of the non-electric accessory 51 at least until the "big hit win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

On the other hand, when the game result is "low probability result", the player finishes the game in the open / close execution mode and then executes the game 100 times (from the high frequency support mode). By letting the game ball enter the lower operating port 37 via the right-handed route (until it is switched to the low-frequency support mode), the game times can be executed. After that, since it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the lower operating port 37 via the right-handed route, the player can play the game by inserting the game ball into the upper operating port 36 via the left-handed route. Can be executed. Therefore, when the non-electric accessory 51 is arranged on the left-handed route, the player shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state, and then executes 100 game times. In addition, if the game state is not shifted to the open / close execution mode, the game ball will be inserted into the non-electric accessory 51 via the left-handed route. In this case, the non-electric accessory 51 shifts from the open state to the closed state, so that the player puts the game state into the open / close execution mode by the time the game is executed 100 times. You can play the game with the expectation that it will be transferred.

In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets a high-frequency support mode with no limit on the number of times and a high-frequency support mode with a limit of 100 times, so that the pachinko machine 10 has an advantageous gaming state and a disadvantageous gaming state for the player. Although the state has been created, by setting a gaming state other than these, a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player may be created. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by changing the number of game times in which the high-frequency support mode is continued after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, depending on whether or not the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by changing the number of game times in which the high-probability mode is continued after the opening / closing execution mode ends. ..

According to such an embodiment, the following actions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 temporarily enters a game ball flowing down the game area based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. The crune 53A is provided to enable the ball, and the croon 53A is provided with holes 533A to 533C for starting the game in the open / close execution mode when the game ball enters the ball. After shifting to the open / close execution mode, the game in the open / close execution mode can be started by inserting the game ball into each of the holes 533A to 533C. Further, the crune 53A includes a rotating body 537 and a saucer 538 that draw a lottery as to whether or not to shift the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters each of the holes 533A to 533C. Therefore, when the lottery executed by the rotating body 537 and the saucer 538 is won and the non-electric accessory 51 is shifted from the closed state to the open state, the player uses the main control device 60. After shifting the game state to the next opening / closing execution mode, the game in the opening / closing execution mode can be started by inserting the game ball into the non-electric accessory 51. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the options of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.

(2) The opening / closing execution mode game that starts when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A is larger than the opening / closing execution mode game that starts when the game ball enters the holes 533B and 533C. Since a high value is given to the player, the player expects the ball to enter the hole 533A when starting the game in the open / close execution mode by letting the croon 53A enter the game ball. .. Further, when the lottery executed by the rotating body 537 is won and the non-electric accessory 51 is shifted from the closed state to the open state, the player uses the main control device 60 to change the game state to the next time. By inserting the game ball into the non-electric accessory 51 after shifting to the open / close execution mode, the player has a higher value than the game in the open / close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters each of the holes 533B and 533C. It is possible to start the game of the open / close execution mode given to. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the options of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.

(3) The entry of the game ball into each of the holes 533B and 533C can start the game in the open / close execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the non-electric accessory 51 and the game ball into the hole 533A can be started. The entry is from the opening / closing execution mode game that starts when the game balls enter the holes 533B and 533C by starting the opening / closing execution mode game in which more game balls can be paid out than the predetermined number of game balls. Since it also gives the player a high value, the player expects the ball to enter the hole 533A when starting the game in the open / close execution mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the game.

(4) The game state transition process is an opening / closing execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of times of opening / closing of the variable winning device 38 to a predetermined number when the game balls enter the holes 533B and 533C. By setting the number of times of opening and closing of the variable winning device 38 to be larger than the predetermined number of times when the game is started and the game ball is entered into the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A, the number of times of opening and closing is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. Since the game in the open / close execution mode in which the game ball can be paid out is started, the player expects the ball to enter the hole 533A when starting the game in the open / close execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(5) Since each of the holes 533A to 533C is provided on the rolling surface 531 of the crune 53A, the player pays attention to the whereabouts of the game ball that has entered the crune 53A. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(6) The opening / closing lottery unit includes a rotating body 537 that rotates about an axis passing through the center of the rolling surface 531 and receives a game ball that has entered each of the holes 533A to 533C. The rotating body passages 537C2 and 537C3 that do not shift the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters, and the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters. It is provided with a rotating body passage 537C1 that shifts to. According to this, the opening / closing lottery unit independently closes the non-electric accessory 51 without being affected by the crune 53A having the holes 533A to 533C that start the game in the opening / closing execution mode when the game ball enters. It is possible to draw a lottery as to whether or not to shift from the state to the open state. Further, when the non-electric accessory 51 is shifted from the closed state to the open state by entering the game ball that has entered the holes 533A to 533C into the rotating body passage 537C1 of the rotating body 537, the game is played. After shifting the game state to the next opening / closing execution mode by the main control device 60, the player inserts the game ball into the non-electric accessory 51 to enter the game ball into the holes 533B and 533C. It is possible to start a game in the open / close execution mode that gives the player a higher value than the game in the open / close execution mode to be started. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the options of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.

(7) The non-electric accessory 51 shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball at each plate-shaped body 513, and is closed by receiving the game ball at each lower blade member 515. Since the state shifts from to the open state, the open / closed state can be shifted using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other power such as electric power.

(8) After the player finishes the game in the open / close execution mode, the player goes down via the right-handed route until the game is executed 100 times (until the high frequency support mode is switched to the low frequency support mode). By inserting the game ball into the operating port 37, the game times can be executed. After that, since it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the lower operating port 37 via the right-handed route, the player can play the game by inserting the game ball into the upper operating port 36 via the left-handed route. Can be executed. Therefore, when the non-electric accessory 51 is arranged on the left-handed route, the player shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state, and then executes 100 game times. In addition, if the game state is not shifted to the open / close execution mode, the game ball will be inserted into the non-electric accessory 51 via the left-handed route. In this case, the non-electric accessory 51 shifts from the open state to the closed state, so that the player puts the game state into the open / close execution mode by the time the game is executed 100 times. You can play the game with the expectation that it will be transferred.

[Third Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts already described will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 44 is a front view of the game board according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 includes a crune 53 provided in the area on the left side of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, enters the hole 533A (16 round execution gate) of the crune 53, and falls downward. Then, the game ball guided to the non-electric accessory 51 via the connecting passage 535 shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state. In other words, in the first embodiment, the game ball that has entered the 16-round execution gate is always guided by the non-electric accessory 51.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game board 31 includes a crune 53B provided in the area on the left side of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, and the game ball that has entered the 16-round execution gate of the crune 53B is not necessarily the game ball. It differs from the first embodiment in that it is not guided by the non-electric accessory 51.

FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the vicinity of the crune enlarged and viewed from diagonally above.
As shown in FIG. 45, the crune 53B includes a first crune 55 connected to the guide rail 525 and a second crune 56 arranged below the first crune 55.
The first crune 55 includes a disk-shaped rolling surface 551 that rolls a game ball guided to the first crune 55 via a guide rail 525, and a side wall 552 provided along the peripheral edge of the rolling surface 551. It has.
The guide rail 525 guides the game ball to the rolling surface 551 along the side wall 552.

The rolling surface 551 is formed by two holes 553A and 553B formed at a predetermined distance from the center thereof and at equal intervals with each other, and the holes 553A and 553A formed at the center thereof. It is provided with a protrusion 554 having two side surfaces that incline so as to descend toward the 553B side. Further, the rolling surface 551 is inclined so as to descend from the side wall 552 side toward the holes 553A and 553B, respectively.
Therefore, the game ball guided to the first crune 55 via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 551 along the side wall 552 and then enters any of the holes 553A and 553B. (See arrow A in the figure).

Each of the holes 553A and 553B includes detection sensors 40i and 40j (see FIG. 114) for detecting the entry of a game ball, and the detection sensors 40i and 40j are arranged on the back side of the game board 31. Specifically, the detection sensor 40i detects the entry of the game ball into the hole 553A, and the detection sensor 40j detects the entry of the game ball into the hole 553B. The pachinko machine 10 does not pay out the prize balls when the balls enter the holes 553A and 553B, unlike the case where the balls enter the various winning openings. Further, the detection sensors 40i and 40j may be any as long as they can individually detect the winning of the game ball, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor or the like can be adopted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the detection sensor 40i detects the entry of the game ball into the hole 553A, so that the hole 553A functions as a 16-round execution gate. Further, since the detection sensor 40j detects the entry of the game ball into the hole 553B, the hole 553B functions as a four-round execution gate. In this embodiment, the detection sensor 40k is different from the first embodiment in that it is not used.

Each of the holes 553A and 553B wins the transition to the open / close execution mode in the internal lottery, and when the transition to the open / close execution mode is performed, it is an opportunity to start the round game. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 wins the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in the internal lottery, and after the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, when a ball enters each of the holes 553A and 553B, the opening / closing door 38b Is set to the open state, and execution of a predetermined number of round games is started.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 starts executing 16 round games when the ball enters the hole 553A. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 starts executing 16 round games in the hole 553A. A mark is displayed around the hole 553A to suggest that.
Further, since the pachinko machine 10 starts executing the four round games when the ball enters the hole 553B, it is suggested that the hole 553B starts executing the four round games. The mark is not displayed to do.

Further, the first crune 55 includes a guide rail 555A that guides the game ball that has entered the hole 553A to the second crune 56, and a guide rail 555B that guides the game ball that has entered the hole 553B to the second crune 56. I have.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the first crune 55 flows down the game area based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. It functions as a variable ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter temporarily.
Further, the first crune 55 is provided with holes 553A and 553B (a plurality of ball entry portions) for inserting a game ball that has entered the first crune 55. The first crune 55 has a rolling surface 551 for rolling a game ball that has entered the first crune 55, and a plurality of ball entry portions are provided on the rolling surface 551 and the rolling surface 551 is provided. Enter a rolling game ball. Specifically, the rolling surface 551 is formed at a predetermined distance from the center of the rolling surface 551, and includes a plurality of ball entry portions provided at equal intervals from each other.

In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of ball entry portions are provided on the rolling surface 551 of the first crune 55, and a game ball that rolls on the rolling surface 551 is inserted. On the other hand, the plurality of ball entry units may be provided in, for example, a distribution mechanism that distributes the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means to any of the plurality of ball entry units. In this case, the probabilities of distributing the game ball to any of the plurality of ball entry portions by the distribution mechanism may be the same or different. In short, the variable ball entry means may include a plurality of ball entry portions.
Further, in the present embodiment, the variable ball entry means includes a plurality of ball entry sections, but the variable ball entry means may include one ball entry section.

Here, as described above, the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 553A (second ball entry portion) are 16-round execution gates that start execution of 16 round games. Further, the hole 553B (first ball entry portion) is a four-round execution gate that starts execution of four round games. Therefore, the opening / closing execution mode game that starts when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 553A has a higher value than the opening / closing execution mode game that starts when the game ball enters the hole 553B. It is given to the person.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 sets the number of times of opening and closing of the variable winning device 38 to a predetermined number of times (4 times in this embodiment) when the game ball enters the hole 553B, so that the pachinko machine 10 can play a predetermined number of game balls. When the game in the open / close execution mode that can be paid out is started and the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 553A, the variable winning device 38 is opened / closed more times than a predetermined number (16 times in this embodiment). By setting to, the game of the open / close execution mode in which more game balls than a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out is started.

In the present embodiment, the game in the open / close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 553A is a game in the hole 553B by setting the number of times the variable winning device 38 is opened / closed. It gives the player a higher value than the game in the open / close execution mode that starts when the ball enters, but for example, by setting the opening time of the variable winning device 38, the game ball enters the hole 553B. The player may be given a higher value than the game in the open / close execution mode that starts at the time of the ball. In short, the game of the open / close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the second ball entry portion and the reverse ball entry means is the open / close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the first ball entry portion. It suffices to give the player a higher value than the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the hole 553A is a 16-round execution gate for starting the execution of 16 round games, the hole 553B is a 4-round execution gate for starting the execution of the four round games, and the holes 553A and 553B are respectively. The correspondence between the 16-round execution gate and the 4-round execution gate was fixed. On the other hand, the correspondence between the holes 553A and 553B and the 16-round execution gate and the 4-round execution gate does not have to be fixed. For example, the correspondence is changed based on the result of the internal lottery. You may. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the game playability and can improve the player's attention to the game.

The second crune 56 is provided along a disk-shaped rolling surface 561 for rolling a game ball guided to the second crune 56 via the guide rail 555A and the guide rail 555B, and a peripheral edge of the rolling surface 561. It is provided with a side wall 562.
The guide rail 555A and the guide rail 555B guide the game ball to the rolling surface 561 along the side wall 562.

The rolling surface 561 is formed with three holes 563A to 563C formed at a predetermined distance from the center thereof and at equal intervals from each other, and the holes 563A to 563C formed at the center thereof. It is provided with a protrusion 564 having three side surfaces that incline so as to descend toward the 563C side. Further, the rolling surface 561 is inclined so as to descend from the side wall 562 side toward each hole 563A to 563C side.
Therefore, the game ball guided to the second crune 56 via the guide rail 555A and the guide rail 555B rolls on the rolling surface 561 along the side wall 562 and then enters any of the holes 563A to 563C. (See arrow B in the figure).

Further, the second crune 56 is connected to the hole 563A formed on the front side (front side in the drawing) of the game board 31, and as shown by the arrow C in the drawing, enters the hole 563A and moves downward. It is connected to the connecting passage 565 that guides the dropped game ball to the non-electric accessory 51 and the two holes 563B and 563C formed on the back side (back side in the figure) of the game board 31, and the arrow D in the figure. As shown in the above, a discharge passage 566 is provided which allows the game ball that has entered the holes 563B and 563C and has fallen downward to be discharged to the game area through the opening 311 (see FIG. 44).

Since the connecting passage 565 guides the game ball to the non-electric accessory 51 in the same manner as the connecting passage 535 in the first embodiment, it is suggested that the hole 563A guides the game ball to the non-electric accessory 51. A mark is displayed around the hole 563A as shown above.
Since the discharge passage 566 discharges the game ball to the game area in the same manner as the discharge passage 536 in the first embodiment, the holes 563B and 563C have holes 563B so as to suggest that the game ball is discharged to the game area. , 563C No mark is displayed around.

<About the flow when shifting to the open / close execution mode>
FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a display screen of a symbol display device, a non-electric accessory, and a right-side variable ball entry mechanism when the non-electric accessory is shifted to the open / close execution mode when the non-electric accessory is not opened. Note that FIG. 46 shows a simplified non-electric accessory 51 at the lower left of the display screen G.
Specifically, FIG. 46 (A) is a diagram showing a display screen G at the time of transition to the open / close execution mode. FIGS. 46 (B) and 46 (C) are views showing a non-electric accessory 51 that has not been opened after the ball has entered the 4-round execution gate. FIGS. 46 (D) and 46 (E) are views showing a non-electric accessory 51 that has been opened after the ball has entered the four-round execution gate. FIG. 46 (F) is a diagram showing a display screen G when the opening notification effect for notifying the player of the opening of the non-electric accessory 51 is selected as the ending effect.

When the non-electric accessory 51 shifts to the open / close execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 102 reduces each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 to display the display screen of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. 46 (A). It is arranged at the lower left position of G, and the variation display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is stopped.
Here, when the non-electric accessory 51 shifts to the open / close execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 92 determines in step S1601 that the non-opening command has been received. The effect determination process is executed, and in step S1603, a non-opening effect command related to the non-opening effect determined in the non-opening effect determination process of step S1602 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the non-opening effect based on the non-opening effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 tells the player to hit right by displaying the angel's line "Aim for the crune by hitting right!" Existing in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Suggest.

Further, the MPU 62 executes the crune route setting process in step S1005. In this crune route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the closed state and sets the right variable entry mechanism 52 to the crune route by executing the drive control of the plate drive unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Here, since the blade member 521a is intermittently opened and closed at a cycle of 2 seconds, when the blade member 521a is set to the open state by the blade member driving unit 521c, the game ball tilts the blade member 521a. The ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 through the blade member 521a. Further, when the plate 523a is set to the closed state and set to the crune route, the game ball that reaches the branch position of the guide passage 522 after entering the right variable entry mechanism 52 is the guide rail 525. Will be guided to. After that, the game ball is guided to the first crune 55 via the guide rail 525.
After that, the game ball guided to the first crune 55 of the crune 53B via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 551 along the side wall 552 and then enters any of the holes 553A and 553B. It will be.

FIG. 47 is a top view of the crune when a ball enters the 4-round execution gate. Specifically, FIG. 47 (A) is a top view of the first crune 55, and FIGS. 47 (B) and 47 (C) are top views of the second crune 56.
For example, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 47 (A), when a ball enters the hole 553B (four-round execution gate), the MPU 92 receives the four-round execution command in step S1607. Therefore, in step S1608, the determination process of the 4-round execution effect is executed, and in step S1609, the command for the 4-round execution effect related to the 4-round execution effect determined in the determination process of the 4-round execution effect of step S1608 is issued. Set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 4-round execution effect based on the 4-round execution effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 46 (B) and 46 (D), the MPU 102 has an angel line "4R confirmed! Right-handed!" Presenting in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Is displayed to notify the player that the execution of the four round games is started.

Further, the MPU 62 executes the discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this discharge route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state and sets the right variable entry mechanism 52 to the discharge route by executing the drive control of the plate drive unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Further, when the ball enters the hole 553B (four-round execution gate), the game ball is guided to the second crune 56 via the guide rail 555B. The game ball rolls on the rolling surface 561 along the side wall 562 and then enters any of the holes 563A to 563C.
For example, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 47 (B), when the ball enters the holes 563B and 563C, the game ball is discharged to the game area through the discharge passage 566.

After that, the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S1510. Therefore, in step S1511, the type of the game result is determined based on the content of the opening command, and the game result determined in step S1511 is determined. Executes the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode corresponding to the type. In the example of FIG. 46, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result, so that the MPU 92 is displayed. , It is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Further, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is four, the effect C1 is selected as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the open / close execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

After finishing the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S1514. Therefore, in step S1515, the opening determination process of the non-electric accessory is executed. When the game ball is discharged to the game area in the discharge passage 566, the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electric accessory 51 is not open, so that the non-electric accessory 51 is opened as an ending effect. Select a normal production that does not notify the person. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 46, since the effect C1 is selected as the effect for the open / close execution mode, the MPU 102 is centered on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. 46 (C). By displaying the line of the angel that exists in "Probability change rush!", The player is notified that the mode has been changed to the high probability mode.

Further, for example, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 47 (C), when the ball enters the hole 563A, the game ball is guided to the non-electric accessory 51 via the connecting passage 565. After that, the game ball guided to the non-electric accessory 51 via the connecting passage 565 shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state.

After that, the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S1510. Therefore, in step S1511, the type of the game result is determined based on the content of the opening command, and the game result determined in step S1511 is determined. Executes the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode corresponding to the type. In the example of FIG. 46, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result, so that the MPU 92 is displayed. , It is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Further, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is four, the effect C1 is selected as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the open / close execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

After finishing the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S1514. Therefore, in step S1515, the opening determination process of the non-electric accessory is executed. When the game ball is guided to the non-electric accessory 51 in the connecting passage 565, the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electric accessory 51 is open, so that the non-electric accessory 51 is used as an ending effect. Select the opening notification effect that notifies the player of the opening of. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 46, since the effect C1 is selected as the effect for the open / close execution mode, the MPU 102 is centered on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. 46 (E). By displaying the line of the angel that exists in "Probability change rush!", The player is notified that the mode has been changed to the high probability mode. After that, as shown in FIG. 46 (F), the MPU 102 displays the line of the angel existing in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, "The next jackpot is left-handed to confirm 16R!". , Notifies the player of the opening of the non-electric accessory 51.

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a display screen of a symbol display device, a non-electric accessory, and a right-side variable ball entry mechanism when the non-electric accessory is shifted to the open / close execution mode when the non-electric accessory is not opened. Note that FIG. 48 shows a simplified non-electric accessory 51 at the lower left of the display screen G.
Specifically, FIG. 48A is a diagram showing a display screen G at the time of transition to the open / close execution mode. FIGS. 48 (B) and 48 (C) are views showing a non-electric accessory 51 that has not been opened after the ball has entered the 16-round execution gate. FIGS. 48 (D) and 48 (E) are views showing a non-electric accessory 51 that has been opened after the ball has entered the 16-round execution gate. FIG. 48F is a diagram showing a display screen G when the opening notification effect for notifying the player of the opening of the non-electric accessory 51 is selected as the ending effect.

When the non-electric accessory 51 shifts to the open / close execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 102 reduces each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 to display the display screen of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. 48 (A). It is arranged at the lower left position of G, and the variation display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is stopped.
Here, when the non-electric accessory 51 shifts to the open / close execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 92 determines in step S1601 that the non-opening command has been received. The effect determination process is executed, and in step S1603, a non-opening effect command related to the non-opening effect determined in the non-opening effect determination process of step S1602 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the non-opening effect based on the non-opening effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 tells the player to hit right by displaying the angel's line "Aim for the crune by hitting right!" Existing in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Suggest.

Further, the MPU 62 executes the crune route setting process in step S1005. In this crune route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the closed state and sets the right variable entry mechanism 52 to the crune route by executing the drive control of the plate drive unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Here, since the blade member 521a is intermittently opened and closed at a cycle of 2 seconds, when the blade member 521a is set to the open state by the blade member driving unit 521c, the game ball tilts the blade member 521a. The ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 through the blade member 521a. Further, when the plate 523a is set to the closed state and set to the crune route, the game ball that reaches the branch position of the guide passage 522 after entering the right variable entry mechanism 52 is the guide rail 525. Will be guided to. After that, the game ball is guided to the crune 53 via the guide rail 525.
After that, the game ball guided to the first crune 55 of the crune 53B via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 551 along the side wall 552 and then enters any of the holes 553A and 553B. It will be.

FIG. 49 is a top view of the crune when a ball enters the 16-round execution gate. Specifically, FIG. 49 (A) is a top view of the first crune 55, and FIGS. 49 (B) and 49 (C) are top views of the second crune 56.
For example, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 49 (A), when the ball enters the hole 553A (16 round execution gate), the MPU 92 receives the 16 round execution command in step S1610. Since the determination is made, in step S1611, the 16-round execution effect determination process is executed, and in step S1612, the 16-round execution effect command related to the 16-round execution effect determined in the 16-round execution effect determination process of step S1611 is issued. Set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 16-round execution effect based on the 16-round execution effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 48 (B) and 48 (D), the MPU 102 has an angel line "16R confirmed! Right-handed!" Presenting in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Is displayed to notify the player that the execution of 16 round games is to be started.

Further, the MPU 62 executes the discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this discharge route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state and sets the right variable entry mechanism 52 to the discharge route by executing the drive control of the plate drive unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Further, when the ball enters the hole 553A (16 round execution gate), the game ball is guided to the second crune 56 via the guide rail 555A. The game ball rolls on the rolling surface 561 along the side wall 562 and then enters any of the holes 563A to 563C.
For example, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 49 (B), when the ball enters the holes 563B and 563C, the game ball is discharged to the game area through the discharge passage 566.

After that, the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S1510. Therefore, in step S1511, the type of the game result is determined based on the content of the opening command, and the game result determined in step S1511 is determined. Executes the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode corresponding to the type. In the example of FIG. 48, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result, so that the MPU 92 is displayed. , It is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Further, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is 16 times, the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the open / close execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

After finishing the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S1514. Therefore, in step S1515, the opening determination process of the non-electric accessory is executed. When the game ball is discharged to the game area in the discharge passage 566, the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electric accessory 51 is not open, so that the non-electric accessory 51 is opened as an ending effect. Select a normal production that does not notify the person. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 48, since the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the open / close execution mode, the MPU 102 is centered on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. 48 (C). By displaying the line of the angel that exists in "Probability change rush!", The player is notified that the mode has been changed to the high probability mode.

Further, for example, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 49 (C), when the ball enters the hole 563A, the game ball is guided to the non-electric accessory 51 via the connecting passage 565. After that, the game ball guided to the non-electric accessory 51 via the connecting passage 565 shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state.

After that, the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S1510. Therefore, in step S1511, the type of the game result is determined based on the content of the opening command, and the game result determined in step S1511 is determined. Executes the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode corresponding to the type. In the example of FIG. 48, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays the combination of symbols having the same odd number (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result, so that the MPU 92 is displayed. , It is determined that the game result is the "most advantageous result". Further, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is 16 times, the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the open / close execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

After finishing the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S1514. Therefore, in step S1515, the opening determination process of the non-electric accessory is executed. When the game ball is guided to the non-electric accessory 51 in the connecting passage 565, the MPU 92 determines in step S1515 that the non-electric accessory 51 is open, so that the non-electric accessory 51 is used as an ending effect. Select the opening notification effect that notifies the player of the opening of. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 48, since the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the open / close execution mode, the MPU 102 is centered on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. 48 (E). By displaying the line of the angel that exists in "Probability change rush!", The player is notified that the mode has been changed to the high probability mode. After that, as shown in FIG. 48 (F), the MPU 102 displays the line of the angel existing in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, "The next jackpot is left-handed to confirm 16R!". , Notifies the player of the opening of the non-electric accessory 51.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the second crune 56 functions as a lottery crune having a rolling surface 561 (rolling surface for lottery) for rolling the game ball that has entered the holes 553A and 553B. There is. Further, the second crune 56 is provided on the rolling surface 561 and is provided with holes 563A to 563C (a plurality of lottery ball entry portions) for inserting a game ball rolling on the rolling surface 561. Then, the plurality of lottery entry units are the holes 563B and 563C (first lottery entry units) that do not shift the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters. It is provided with a hole 563A (second lottery ball entry section) for shifting the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters the ball. Therefore, the second crune 56 functions as an opening / closing lottery unit for drawing whether or not to shift the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters the holes 553A and 553B. ing.

In the present embodiment, the second crune 56 is adopted as the opening / closing lottery section, but for example, a counter is used as in the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. The lottery that was held may be adopted. In short, what kind of lottery is the opening / closing lottery section if it is possible to draw a lottery as to whether or not to shift the reversing ball entry means from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters the entry section. You may.

Here, in the present embodiment, the starting ball entering means includes an upper operating port 36 (first starting ball entering portion) and a lower operating port 37 (second starting ball entering portion).
Further, the pachinko machine 10 has a left-handed route (first route) in which the game ball is likely to enter the upper operating port 36 and is less likely to be generated in the lower operating port 37, and a lower route. It is provided with a right-handed route (second route) in which it is easy to generate a game ball into the operating port 37 and it is difficult to generate a game ball entering the upper operating port 36. The non-electric accessory 51 is arranged on the left-handed route.

Further, the main control device 60 has a low frequency support mode (first gaming state) in which the probability of entering the lower operating port 37 is lower than that of the upper operating port 36, and the main control device 60 is placed in the lower operating port 37 rather than the upper operating port 36. It is provided with a high-frequency support mode (second game state) in which the probability of entering a ball is high, and functions as a game state switching unit for switching between a low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode.
Specifically, the main control device 60 switches from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode after finishing the game in the open / close execution mode. Then, when the game result is "explicit small round high probability result" or "most advantageous result", the main control device 60 continues the high frequency support mode at least until it becomes "big hit winning" in the winning or losing lottery. .. Further, when the game result is "low probability result", the main control device 60 executes the game times (internal lottery) a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), and then starts from the high frequency support mode. Switch to low frequency support mode.

Therefore, if the game result is "explicit small round high probability result" or "most advantageous result", the player will be "big hit winner" at least in the winning / losing lottery after finishing the game in the open / close execution mode. Up to this point, the game round can be executed by inserting the game ball into the lower operating port 37 via the right-handed route. According to this, the player can maintain the open state of the non-electric accessory 51 at least until the "big hit win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

On the other hand, when the game result is "low probability result", the player finishes the game in the open / close execution mode and then executes the game 100 times (from the high frequency support mode). By letting the game ball enter the lower operating port 37 via the right-handed route (until it is switched to the low-frequency support mode), the game times can be executed. After that, since it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the lower operating port 37 via the right-handed route, the player can play the game by inserting the game ball into the upper operating port 36 via the left-handed route. Can be executed. Therefore, when the non-electric accessory 51 is arranged on the left-handed route, the player shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state, and then executes 100 game times. In addition, if the game state is not shifted to the open / close execution mode, the game ball will be inserted into the non-electric accessory 51 via the left-handed route. In this case, the non-electric accessory 51 shifts from the open state to the closed state, so that the player puts the game state into the open / close execution mode by the time the game is executed 100 times. You can play the game with the expectation that it will be transferred.

In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets a high-frequency support mode with no limit on the number of times and a high-frequency support mode with a limit of 100 times, so that the pachinko machine 10 has an advantageous gaming state and a disadvantageous gaming state for the player. Although the state has been created, by setting a gaming state other than these, a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player may be created. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by changing the number of game times in which the high-frequency support mode is continued after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, depending on whether or not the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by changing the number of game times in which the high-probability mode is continued after the opening / closing execution mode ends. ..

According to such an embodiment, the following actions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 temporarily enters a game ball flowing down the game area based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. The first crune 55 that enables the ball is provided, and the first crune 55 is provided with holes 553A and 553B that start the game in the open / close execution mode when the game ball enters, so that the player can use the main control device 60. After shifting the game state to the open / close execution mode, the game in the open / close execution mode can be started by inserting the game ball into the holes 553A and 553B. Further, the first crune 55 includes a second croon 56 that draws a lottery as to whether or not to shift the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters each of the holes 553A and 553B. Therefore, when the lottery executed by the second crune 56 is won and the non-electric accessory 51 is shifted from the closed state to the open state, the player is in the gaming state by the main control device 60. After shifting to the next opening / closing execution mode, the game in the opening / closing execution mode can be started by inserting the game ball into the non-electric accessory 51. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the options of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.

(2) The opening / closing execution mode game that starts when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 553A has a higher value than the opening / closing execution mode game that starts when the game ball enters the hole 553B. Since it is given to the player, the player expects the ball to enter the hole 553A when the game of the opening / closing execution mode is started by inserting the game ball into the first crune 55. Further, when the lottery executed by the second crune 56 is won and the non-electric accessory 51 is shifted from the closed state to the open state, the player changes the game state to the next time by the main control device 60. By inserting the game ball into the non-electric accessory 51 after shifting to the open / close execution mode, the player is given a higher value than the game in the open / close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the hole 553B. You can start the game in the open / close execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the options of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.

(3) The entry of the game ball into the hole 553B can start the game in the open / close execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the entry of the game ball into the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 553A By starting a game in the open / close execution mode in which more game balls can be paid out than a predetermined number of game balls, the player has a higher value than the game in the open / close execution mode which starts when the game ball enters the hole 553B. Therefore, the player expects the ball to enter the hole 553A when starting the game in the open / close execution mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the game.

(4) The game state transition process starts a game in the open / close execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of times of opening / closing of the variable winning device 38 to a predetermined number when the game ball enters the hole 553B. By setting the number of times of opening and closing of the variable winning device 38 to be larger than the predetermined number of times when the game ball is entered into the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 553A, the number of game balls is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. Since the opening / closing execution mode game is started, the player expects the ball to enter the hole 553A when starting the opening / closing execution mode game. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(5) Since the holes 553A and 553B are provided on the rolling surface 551 of the first crune 55, the player pays attention to the whereabouts of the game ball that has entered the first crune 55. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(6) The opening / closing lottery section has holes 563B and 563C that do not shift the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters, and the non-electric accessory 51 when the game ball enters. It comprises a second crune 56 with a hole 563A that causes the 51 to transition from a closed state to an open state. According to this, the opening / closing lottery unit independently performs the non-electric accessory 51 without being affected by the first crune 55 provided with the holes 553A and 553B that start the game in the opening / closing execution mode when the game ball enters. It is possible to draw a lottery as to whether or not to shift from the closed state to the open state. Further, when the non-electric accessory 51 is shifted from the closed state to the open state by inserting the game ball that has entered the holes 553A and 553B into the hole 563A, the player may perform the main control device 60. After shifting the game state to the next opening / closing execution mode, the game is higher than the opening / closing execution mode game that starts when the game ball enters the hole 553B by inserting the game ball into the non-electric accessory 51. It is possible to start a game in the open / close execution mode that gives value to the player. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the options of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.

(7) The non-electric accessory 51 shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball at each plate-shaped body 513, and is closed by receiving the game ball at each lower blade member 515. Since the state shifts from to the open state, the open / closed state can be shifted using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other power such as electric power.

(8) After the player finishes the game in the open / close execution mode, the player goes down via the right-handed route until the game is executed 100 times (until the high frequency support mode is switched to the low frequency support mode). By inserting the game ball into the operating port 37, the game times can be executed. After that, since it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the lower operating port 37 via the right-handed route, the player can play the game by inserting the game ball into the upper operating port 36 via the left-handed route. Can be executed. Therefore, when the non-electric accessory 51 is arranged on the left-handed route, the player shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state, and then executes 100 game times. In addition, if the game state is not shifted to the open / close execution mode, the game ball will be inserted into the non-electric accessory 51 via the left-handed route. In this case, the non-electric accessory 51 shifts from the open state to the closed state, so that the player puts the game state into the open / close execution mode by the time the game is executed 100 times. You can play the game with the expectation that it will be transferred.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts already described will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 50 is a front view of the game board according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 includes a crune 53 provided in the area on the left side of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52. Then, the game ball that enters the hole 533A of the crune 53, falls downward, and is guided to the non-electric accessory 51 via the connecting passage 535 shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state. I was letting you. Further, the game balls that entered the holes 533B and 533C of the crune 53 and fell downward were discharged to the game area through the discharge passage 536.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, the game board 31 includes a crune 53C provided in the area on the left side of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52. Then, all the game balls that have entered any of the holes 533A to 533C (see FIG. 51) of the crune 53C shift the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state. Different from.

FIG. 51 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the crune as viewed from above.
As shown in FIG. 51, the crune 53C is provided along a disk-shaped rolling surface 531 for rolling a game ball guided to the croon 53 via a guide rail 525, and a peripheral edge of the rolling surface 531. It is provided with a side wall 532.
The guide rail 525 guides the game ball to the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532.

The rolling surface 531 is formed with three holes 533A to 533C formed at a predetermined distance from the center thereof and at equal intervals from each other, and holes 533A to 533C formed at the center thereof. It is provided with a protrusion 534 having three side surfaces that incline so as to descend toward the 533C side. Further, the rolling surface 531 is inclined so as to descend from the side wall 532 side toward each hole 533A to 533C side (see FIG. 4).
Therefore, the game ball guided to the crune 53 via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532 and then enters any of the holes 533A to 533C (FIG. FIG. See middle arrow A).

Each of the holes 533A to 533C includes detection sensors 40i to 40k (see FIG. 11) for detecting the entry of a game ball, and the detection sensors 40i to 40k are arranged on the back side of the game board 31. Specifically, the detection sensor 40i detects the entry of the game ball into the hole 533A, the detection sensor 40j detects the entry of the game ball into the hole 533B, and the detection sensor 40k enters the hole 533C. Detects the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 10 does not pay out the prize balls when the balls enter the holes 533A to 533C, unlike the case where the balls enter the various winning openings. Further, the detection sensors 40i to 40k may be any as long as they can individually detect the winning of the game ball, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor or the like can be adopted.

Each of the holes 533A to 533C wins the transition to the open / close execution mode in the internal lottery, and when the transition to the open / close execution mode is performed, it is an opportunity to start the round game. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 wins the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in the internal lottery, and after the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, when a ball enters each of the holes 533A to 533C, the opening / closing door 38b Is set to the open state, and execution of a predetermined number of round games is started.

Specifically, when the pachinko machine 10 enters the hole 533A, the pachinko machine 10 starts executing the 16 round games. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 starts executing the 16 round games in the hole 533A. A mark is displayed around the hole 533A to suggest that.
Further, since the pachinko machine 10 starts executing the four round games when the ball enters the holes 533B and 533C, the pachinko machine 10 starts executing the four round games in the holes 533B and 533C. The mark is not displayed to suggest that it should be done.

Further, the crune 53C has a connecting passage 535 that guides the game ball to the non-electric accessory 51, and a guide passage 538 that guides the game ball that has entered the holes 533A to 533C and has fallen downward to the connecting passage 535. I have.
The guide path 539 connects the three upstream guide paths 539A connected to the holes 533A to 533C and the downstream guide path 539B connected to each of the upstream guide paths 539A and connected to the connecting passage 535. I have.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the crune 53C flows down the game area based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. Temporarily allows the player to enter the ball, and also functions as a variable ball entry means for shifting the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters the ball.

Further, the crune 53C includes holes 533B and 533C (first ball entry portion) and holes 533A (second entry portion) for entering the game ball that has entered the crune 53C. The crune 53C has a rolling surface 531 for rolling a game ball that has entered the croon 53C, and a first ball entry portion and a second entry portion are provided on the rolling surface 531 and roll. A game ball that rolls on the moving surface 531 is inserted.

In the present embodiment, the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section are provided on the rolling surface 531 of the crune 53, and a game ball that rolls on the rolling surface 531 is inserted. .. On the other hand, the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section distribute, for example, a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means into the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section. It may be provided in the mechanism. In this case, the probabilities of distributing the game ball to the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section by the distribution mechanism may be the same or different. In short, the variable ball entry means may include a first ball entry section and a second ball entry section.

Here, as described above, the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A are 16-round execution gates that start execution of 16 round games. Further, each of the holes 533B and 533C is a 4-round execution gate that starts execution of 4 round games. Therefore, the game in the open / close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A is higher than the game in the open / close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the holes 533B and 533C. It gives value to the player.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 sets the number of times of opening and closing of the variable winning device 38 to a predetermined number of times (4 times in the present embodiment) when the game ball enters each of the holes 533B and 533C. When the game in the open / close execution mode in which the game ball can be paid out is started and the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A, the variable winning device 38 is opened / closed more times than a predetermined number (in the present embodiment). By setting (16 times), a game in an open / close execution mode in which more game balls than a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out is started.

In the present embodiment, the opening / closing execution mode game that starts when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A is performed by setting the number of opening / closing times of the variable winning device 38, respectively, for the holes 533B and 533C. The player is given a higher value than the game in the open / close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the ball, but for example, by setting the opening time of the variable winning device 38, each hole 533B, 533C The player may be given a higher value than the game in the open / close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the ball. In short, the game of the open / close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the second ball entry portion and the reverse ball entry means is the open / close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the first ball entry portion. It suffices to give the player a higher value than the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the holes 533A are used as 16-round execution gates for starting the execution of 16 round games, and the holes 533B and 533C are used as 4-round execution gates for starting the execution of 4 round games. The correspondence between 533A to 533C and the 16-round execution gate and the 4-round execution gate was fixed. On the other hand, the correspondence between the holes 533A to 533C and the 16-round execution gate and the 4-round execution gate does not have to be fixed. For example, the correspondence is changed based on the result of the internal lottery. You may. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the game playability and can improve the player's attention to the game.

Here, in the present embodiment, the starting ball entering means includes an upper operating port 36 (first starting ball entering portion) and a lower operating port 37 (second starting ball entering portion).
Further, the pachinko machine 10 has a left-handed route (first route) in which the game ball is likely to enter the upper operating port 36 and is less likely to be generated in the lower operating port 37, and a lower route. It is provided with a right-handed route (second route) in which it is easy to generate a game ball into the operating port 37 and it is difficult to generate a game ball entering the upper operating port 36. The non-electric accessory 51 is arranged on the left-handed route.

Further, the main control device 60 has a low frequency support mode (first gaming state) in which the probability of entering the lower operating port 37 is lower than that of the upper operating port 36, and the main control device 60 is placed in the lower operating port 37 rather than the upper operating port 36. It is provided with a high-frequency support mode (second game state) in which the probability of entering a ball is high, and functions as a game state switching unit for switching between a low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode.
Specifically, the main control device 60 switches from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode after finishing the game in the open / close execution mode. Then, when the game result is "explicit small round high probability result" or "most advantageous result", the main control device 60 continues the high frequency support mode at least until it becomes "big hit winning" in the winning or losing lottery. .. Further, when the game result is "low probability result", the main control device 60 executes the game times (internal lottery) a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), and then starts from the high frequency support mode. Switch to low frequency support mode.

Therefore, if the game result is "explicit small round high probability result" or "most advantageous result", the player will be "big hit winner" at least in the winning / losing lottery after finishing the game in the open / close execution mode. Up to this point, the game round can be executed by inserting the game ball into the lower operating port 37 via the right-handed route. According to this, the player can maintain the open state of the non-electric accessory 51 at least until the "big hit win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

On the other hand, when the game result is "low probability result", the player finishes the game in the open / close execution mode and then executes the game 100 times (from the high frequency support mode). By letting the game ball enter the lower operating port 37 via the right-handed route (until it is switched to the low-frequency support mode), the game times can be executed. After that, since it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the lower operating port 37 via the right-handed route, the player can play the game by inserting the game ball into the upper operating port 36 via the left-handed route. Can be executed. Therefore, when the non-electric accessory 51 is arranged on the left-handed route, the player shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state, and then executes 100 game times. In addition, if the game state is not shifted to the open / close execution mode, the game ball will be inserted into the non-electric accessory 51 via the left-handed route. In this case, the non-electric accessory 51 shifts from the open state to the closed state, so that the player puts the game state into the open / close execution mode by the time the game is executed 100 times. You can play the game with the expectation that it will be transferred.

In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets a high-frequency support mode with no limit on the number of times and a high-frequency support mode with a limit of 100 times, so that the pachinko machine 10 has an advantageous gaming state and a disadvantageous gaming state for the player. Although the state has been created, by setting a gaming state other than these, a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player may be created. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by changing the number of game times in which the high-frequency support mode is continued after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, depending on whether or not the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by changing the number of game times in which the high-probability mode is continued after the opening / closing execution mode ends. ..

According to such an embodiment, the following actions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 temporarily enters a game ball flowing down the game area based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. A croon 53C that enables a ball is provided, and the crune 53C starts a game in the open / close execution mode when the game ball enters the ball. Therefore, the player shifts the game state to the open / close execution mode by the main control device 60, and then the player starts the game. By inserting the game ball into the crune 53C, the game in the open / close execution mode can be started. Further, when the non-electric accessory 51 is shifted from the closed state to the open state by inserting the game ball into the crune 53C, the player opens and closes the game state next time with the main control device 60. After shifting to the execution mode, the game in the opening / closing execution mode can be started by inserting the game ball into the non-electric accessory 51. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the options of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.

(2) The opening / closing execution mode game that starts when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A is larger than the opening / closing execution mode game that starts when the game ball enters the holes 533B and 533C. Since a high value is given to the player, the player expects the ball to enter the hole 533A when starting the game in the open / close execution mode by letting the crune 53C enter the game ball. .. Further, when the non-electric accessory 51 is shifted from the closed state to the open state by inserting the game ball into the crune 53C, the player opens and closes the game state next time with the main control device 60. By inserting the game ball into the non-electric accessory 51 after shifting to the execution mode, the player is given a higher value than the game in the open / close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters each of the holes 533B and 533C. It is possible to start the game of the opening / closing execution mode to be given. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the options of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.

(3) The entry of the game ball into each of the holes 533B and 533C can start the game in the open / close execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the non-electric accessory 51 and the game ball into the hole 533A can be started. The entry is from the opening / closing execution mode game that starts when the game balls enter the holes 533B and 533C by starting the opening / closing execution mode game in which more game balls can be paid out than the predetermined number of game balls. Since it also gives the player a high value, the player expects the ball to enter the hole 533A when starting the game in the open / close execution mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the game.

(4) The game state transition process is an opening / closing execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of times of opening / closing of the variable winning device 38 to a predetermined number when the game balls enter the holes 533B and 533C. By setting the number of times of opening and closing of the variable winning device 38 to be larger than the predetermined number of times when the game is started and the game ball is entered into the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A, the number of times of opening and closing is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. Since the game in the open / close execution mode in which the game ball can be paid out is started, the player expects the ball to enter the hole 533A when starting the game in the open / close execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(5) Since each of the holes 533A to 533C is provided on the rolling surface 531 of the crune 53C, the player pays attention to the whereabouts of the game ball that has entered the crune 53C. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(6) The non-electric accessory 51 shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball at each plate-shaped body 513, and is closed by receiving the game ball at each lower blade member 515. Since the state shifts from to the open state, the open / closed state can be shifted using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other power such as electric power.

(7) After the player finishes the game in the open / close execution mode, the player goes down via the right-handed route until the game is executed 100 times (until the high frequency support mode is switched to the low frequency support mode). By inserting the game ball into the operating port 37, the game times can be executed. After that, since it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the lower operating port 37 via the right-handed route, the player can play the game by inserting the game ball into the upper operating port 36 via the left-handed route. Can be executed. Therefore, when the non-electric accessory 51 is arranged on the left-handed route, the player shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state, and then executes 100 game times. In addition, if the game state is not shifted to the open / close execution mode, the game ball will be inserted into the non-electric accessory 51 via the left-handed route. In this case, the non-electric accessory 51 shifts from the open state to the closed state, so that the player puts the game state into the open / close execution mode by the time the game is executed 100 times. You can play the game with the expectation that it will be transferred.

[Fifth Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts already described will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 52 is a front view of the game board according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 has a non-electric accessory 51, and the non-electric accessory 51 is provided on the lower right side of the general winning opening 35. Further, the game ball that entered the hole 533A of the crune 53 and fell downward was guided to the non-electric accessory 51 via the connecting passage 535.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52, the game board 31 has a crune 53D and a non-electric accessory 57, and the non-electric accessory 57 is a right-side variable ball entry mechanism 52. It differs from the first embodiment in that it is provided on the upper side. Further, the game ball that has entered the hole 533A of the crune 53D and has fallen downward is different from the first embodiment in that it is guided to the non-electric accessory 57 via the connecting passage 535D.

The game board 31 has a plurality of large and small openings formed so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing in the game area. Further, the game board 31 includes a general winning opening 35, an upper operating opening (first starting ball entry portion) 36, a lower operating opening (second starting ball entry portion) 37, and a variable winning device 38 provided in each opening. It has an out port 39 and a non-electric accessory 57. The non-electric accessory 57 is provided above the right variable ball entry mechanism 52. Further, the game board 31 has an opening 313 provided on the lower right side of the general winning opening 35. Further, the game board 31 includes a through gate 41 provided on each of the left side of the central portion and the right side of the central portion, a main display device 42 provided on the upper right side, a variable display unit 43 provided in the central portion, and the like. Have. Further, the game board 31 has a large number of nails 44 planted for appropriately dispersing or adjusting the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (roles) such as a windmill in the game area. ing.

The non-electric accessory 57 is provided on the right side of the game area of the game board 31. Further, the non-electric accessory 57 includes a detection sensor 40f (see FIG. 11) for detecting the entry of a game ball, and the detection sensor 40f is arranged on the back side of the game board 31. The pachinko machine 10 does not pay out the prize balls when the non-electric accessory 57 is hit, unlike the case where the balls are entered into various winning openings. The non-electric accessory 57 will be described in detail later.

The variable display unit 43 includes a symbol display device 47 that variablely displays (variable display or switching display) a symbol that is a type of symbol. Further, the variable display unit 43 includes a center frame 48 arranged so as to surround the symbol display device 47. The upper portion of the center frame 48 is provided so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front surface side thereof. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from falling in front of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and does not cause the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G is lowered due to the fall of the game ball. It is composed.

The center frame 48 includes four first holding lamp portions 49a provided in the upper area of the symbol display device 47 and four second holding lamp portions 49b provided in the area on the right side of the first holding lamp portion 49a. , It is provided with four third holding lamp portions 49c provided in the upper region of the first holding lamp portion 49a.
Further, the center frame 48 includes a right variable ball entry mechanism 52 provided in the lower right area of the symbol display device 47, a crune 53D provided in the left area of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, and a symbol display. It is provided with a guide mechanism 58 provided in the area on the upper right side of the device 47.

The right variable ball entry mechanism 52 allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the inside of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, and then guides the ball to the crune 53D and discharges the game ball to the outside of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52. It has a function of guiding the game ball that has entered the inside of the right variable entry mechanism 52 to the crune route or the discharge route by switching between the discharge route and the discharge route.
The player hits the right with the maximum amount of rotation of the launch handle 27, and sets the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side of the side portion, the game ball can be guided to the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 while avoiding the variable display unit 43 and the like (right-handed route).

The Kroon 53D has substantially the same configuration as that of the first embodiment except for the connecting passage 535.
Specifically, the crune 53D is connected to the hole 533A formed on the front side (front side) of the game board 31, and the game ball that has entered the hole 533A and has fallen downward is a non-electric accessory 57. It is equipped with a connecting passage 535D that guides you to.

The guide mechanism 58 has a function of guiding the game ball flowing down the game area to the non-electric accessory 57. Specifically, the guide mechanism 58 has a passage divided into two guide rails provided so as to be curved so as to reach the non-electric accessory 57 from the upper part of the game area, and a plurality of passages are provided. The width is such that the game balls cannot pass at the same time.
In addition, the player makes the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 27 slightly weaker than the maximum and strikes to the right, and the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is set to the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed. By shifting from the side to the side of the opposite side, the game ball can be reached inside the guide mechanism 58 by reaching the entrance 58A of the guide mechanism 58 (weak hit route).

FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an internal structure of a non-electric accessory. Specifically, FIG. 53 (A) is a view of the internal structure of the non-electric accessory 57 from the front side, and FIG. 53 (B) is a view of the internal structure of the non-electric accessory 57 from the side surface side. It is a figure.
As shown in FIG. 53, the non-electric accessory 57 is fixed to a pair of blade members 571 provided so as to face each other in the horizontal direction, and to the lower end of each blade member 571, and also to the board surface of the game board 31. It includes a pair of rotating shafts 572 that are rotatably provided around orthogonal axes, and a pair of fan-shaped gears 573 that are concentrically fixed to each rotating shaft 572.

As shown in FIG. 53A, each blade member 571 has a facing surface 571A that is horizontally opposed to each other and is arranged along the vertical direction in the closed state of the non-electric accessory 57. Further, as shown in FIG. 53 (B), each blade member 571 is provided in a game area (front side of the game board 31).
Each blade member 571 is provided so as to have a width such that a plurality of game balls cannot pass through the passage 571B formed between the facing surfaces 571A at the same time. Further, the non-electric accessory 57 includes an obstacle plate 57A provided above the entrance of the passage 571B. The distance between the upper end of each blade member 571 and the baffle plate 57A is narrower than that of one game ball. Therefore, the game ball cannot enter the non-electric accessory 57 through the entrance of the passage 571B in the closed state of the non-electric accessory 57.

Of the blade members 571, the blade member 571 on the left side when viewed from the front side has a shaft body 571C formed so as to have a central axis orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 31.
The non-electric accessory 57 includes a cover 574 provided in the game area so as to cover each blade member 571 and the passage 571B.

Further, the non-electric accessory 57 supports a columnar first arm portion 575A that abuts on the shaft body 571C from above and the first arm portion 575A, and is centered on an axis that is orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 31. It is provided with a pair of rotating shafts 575B rotatably provided as the above, and a fan-shaped gear 575C fixed to the rotating shaft 575B.
Further, the non-electric accessory 57 supports a fan-shaped gear 576A provided so as to mesh with the gear 575C and the gear 576A, and is rotatable about an axis orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 31. It includes a pair of rotating shafts 576B provided and a second arm portion 576C fixed to the rotating shafts 576B.

The second arm portion 576C is provided at a position where the ball enters the hole 533A of the crune 53D, falls downward, and receives the game ball discharged from the discharge port formed below the connecting passage 535D.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53 (A), the game ball that enters the hole 533A of the crune 53D, falls downward, and is guided to the non-electric accessory 57 via the connecting passage 535D is the second arm portion. It falls toward 576C.

FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an internal structure of a non-electric accessory when a ball enters the 16-round execution gate. Specifically, FIG. 54 (A) is a view of the internal structure of the non-electric accessory 57 from the front side, and FIG. 54 (B) is a view of the internal structure of the non-electric accessory 57 from the side surface side. It is a figure.
The game ball that has fallen toward the second arm portion 576C rotates the gear 576A and the second arm portion 576C around the rotation shaft 576B, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 54.
The game ball that has fallen toward the second arm portion 576C rotates the second arm portion 576C and then travels through the second arm portion 576C to the discharge passage 577 by utilizing the inclination of the second arm portion 576C. Enter the ball. The discharge passage 577 discharges the game ball into the game area through the opening 313 (see FIG. 52).

Further, since the rotation shaft 575B and the gear 575C rotate with the rotation of the gear 576A, the first arm portion 575A rotates with the rotation of the gear 575C. Then, the first arm portion 575A pushes down the shaft body 571C downward. Each blade member 571 rotates about a pair of rotating shafts 572 via a pair of gears 573 by pushing down the shaft body 571C at the first arm portion 575A. As a result, the non-electric accessory 57 shifts from the closed state to the open state.

Here, the non-electric accessory 57 includes a non-electric accessory open detection sensor 519 that detects the transition from the closed state to the open state, similar to the non-electric accessory 51 in the first embodiment. .. The non-electric accessory opening detection sensor 519 may be any one as long as it can detect the opening of the non-electric accessory 57, and for example, a contact type sensor or the like can be adopted. ..
The distance between the upper end of each blade member 571 and the baffle plate 57A is wider than that of one game ball in the open state of the non-electric accessory 57. Therefore, the game ball can enter the non-electric accessory 57 through the entrance of the passage 571B in the open state of the non-electric accessory 57.

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the non-electric accessory when a ball enters the non-electric accessory. Specifically, FIG. 55 (A) is a view of the internal structure of the non-electric accessory 57 from the front side, and FIG. 55 (B) is a view of the internal structure of the non-electric accessory 57 from the side surface side. It is a figure.
As shown by the arrow in FIG. 55, the game ball that has fallen toward the non-electric accessory 57 via the guide mechanism 58 travels along the facing surface 571A on the right side of the facing surfaces 571A when viewed from the front side. It reaches the central position of the facing surface 571A.

FIG. 56 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the non-electric accessory after the ball enters the non-electric accessory. Specifically, FIG. 56 (A) is a view of the internal structure of the non-electric accessory 57 from the front side, and FIG. 56 (B) is a view of the internal structure of the non-electric accessory 57 from the side surface side. It is a figure.
The game ball that has reached the central position of the facing surface 571A falls downward while rotating each blade member 571 as shown by the arrow in FIG. 56. Specifically, each blade member 571 rotates about a pair of rotating shafts 527 as a central axis via a pair of gears 573.
The game ball that has fallen downward while rotating each blade member 571 enters the discharge connecting passage 578. The discharge connecting passage 578 guides the game ball to the above-mentioned discharge passage 577, and the discharge passage 577 discharges the game ball to the game area through the opening 313 (see FIG. 52).

Further, among the blade members 571, the blade member 571 on the left side when viewed from the front side pushes up the shaft body 571C upward and pushes up the first arm portion 575A upward. Then, the rotation shaft 575B and the gear 575C rotate with the rotation of the first arm portion 575A.

Further, since the gear 576A and the rotation shaft 576B rotate with the rotation of the gear 575C, the second arm portion 576C rotates with the rotation of the gear 576A. Then, the second arm portion 576C rises and returns to the original position. As a result, the non-electric accessory 57 shifts from the open state to the closed state.

The non-electric accessory 57 wins the transition to the open / close execution mode in the internal lottery, and when the transition to the open / close execution mode is entered, it is an opportunity to start the round game. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 wins the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in the internal lottery, and after the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, when the ball enters the non-electric accessory 57, the opening / closing door 38b Is set to the open state, and execution of a predetermined number of round games is started.

Here, the entry into the non-electric accessory 57 is determined by detecting whether or not the game ball has passed through the discharge passage 577 with the detection sensor 40f. In other words, in the open state of the non-electric accessory 57, the game ball entering the non-electric accessory 57 through the entrance of the passage 571B, and in the closed state of the non-electric accessory 57, via the connecting passage 535D. The game ball guided by the non-electric accessory 57 is determined to be a ball entering the non-electric accessory 57.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 starts executing 16 round games when the ball enters the non-electric accessory 57, so that the non-electric accessory 57 has 16 rounds. The characters "16R", which means to start executing the game, are displayed (see FIG. 52).
In the present embodiment, the non-electric accessory 57 and the hole 533A that start the execution of the 16 round games are referred to as 16 round execution gates, and the holes 533B and 533C that start the execution of the 4 round games are 4 It is referred to as a round execution gate, and the 16-round execution gate and the 4-round execution gate are also collectively referred to as a round game execution gate.

As described above, the non-electric accessory 57 has an open state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is allowed to enter and a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter. It functions as a reversing ball entry means that shifts from an open state to a closed state as an opportunity.
The non-electric accessory 57 includes each blade member 571 (first receiving portion) that receives the game ball that has entered the non-electric accessory 57, and a second arm portion 576C (first receiving portion) that receives the game ball that has entered the hole 533A. It is equipped with a second receiving portion), and by receiving a game ball at each blade member 571, it shifts from an open state to a closed state, and by receiving a game ball at the second arm portion 576C, it is released from the closed state. Move to the state.

In the present embodiment, the reversing ball entering means shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball at the first receiving portion, and is closed by receiving the game ball at the second receiving portion. It was shifting from the state to the open state. On the other hand, the reverse ball entry means includes, for example, a drive unit that sets the reverse ball entry means to either a closed state or an open state, and a sensor that detects the entry of the game ball. When the ball entering is detected, the drive unit may shift the reversing ball entering means from the open state to the closed state. In short, the reversing ball entry means has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is entered and a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter, and is opened when the game ball enters. It suffices to shift from the state to the closed state.

Further, the crune 53D allows the game ball that has entered the croon 53D to enter the ball, and the holes 533B and 533C (first) that do not shift the non-electric accessory 57 from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters. 533A (second ball), which allows the non-electric accessory 57 to move from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters the crune 53D. It is equipped with a ball entry section). Further, the crune 53D has a rolling surface 531 for rolling the game ball that has entered the croon 53D, and the first ball entry portion and the second entry portion are provided on the rolling surface 531 and are provided on the rolling surface 531. A game ball that rolls on the rolling surface 531 is inserted.

In the present embodiment, the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section are provided on the rolling surface 531 of the crune 53D, and a game ball that rolls on the rolling surface 531 is inserted. .. On the other hand, the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section distribute, for example, a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means into the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section. It may be provided in the mechanism. In this case, the probabilities of distributing the game ball to the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section by the distribution mechanism may be the same or different. In short, the variable ball entry means may include a first ball entry section and a second ball entry section.

Here, as described above, the non-electric accessory 57 and the hole 533A are 16-round execution gates that start execution of 16 round games. Further, each of the holes 533B and 533C is a 4-round execution gate that starts execution of 4 round games. Therefore, the opening / closing execution mode game that starts when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 57 and the hole 533A is higher than the opening / closing execution mode game that starts when the game ball enters the holes 533B and 533C. It gives value to the player.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 sets the number of times of opening and closing of the variable winning device 38 to a predetermined number of times (4 times in the present embodiment) when the game ball enters each of the holes 533B and 533C. When the game in the open / close execution mode in which the game ball can be paid out is started and the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 57 and the hole 533A, the variable winning device 38 is opened / closed more times than a predetermined number (in the present embodiment). By setting (16 times), a game in an open / close execution mode in which more game balls than a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out is started.

In the present embodiment, the opening / closing execution mode game that starts when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 57 and the hole 533A is performed by setting the number of times of opening / closing of the variable winning device 38, respectively, for the holes 533B and 533C. The player is given a higher value than the game in the open / close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the ball, but for example, by setting the opening time of the variable winning device 38, each hole 533B, 533C The player may be given a higher value than the game in the open / close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the ball. In short, the game of the open / close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the second ball entry portion and the reverse ball entry means is the open / close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the first ball entry portion. It suffices to give the player a higher value than the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the holes 533A are used as 16-round execution gates for starting the execution of 16 round games, and the holes 533B and 533C are used as 4-round execution gates for starting the execution of 4 round games. The correspondence between 533A to 533C and the 16-round execution gate and the 4-round execution gate was fixed. On the other hand, the correspondence between the holes 533A to 533C and the 16-round execution gate and the 4-round execution gate does not have to be fixed. For example, the correspondence is changed based on the result of the internal lottery. You may. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the game playability and can improve the player's attention to the game.

Here, in the present embodiment, the starting ball entering means includes an upper operating port 36 (first starting ball entering portion) and a lower operating port 37 (second starting ball entering portion).
Further, the pachinko machine 10 has a left-handed route (first route) in which the game ball is likely to enter the upper operating port 36 and is less likely to be generated in the lower operating port 37, and a lower route. It is provided with a right-handed route (second route) in which it is easy to generate a game ball into the operating port 37 and it is difficult to generate a game ball entering the upper operating port 36. The non-electric accessory 57 is arranged on a weakening route (third route) different from the left-handed route and the right-handed route.

Further, the main control device 60 has a low frequency support mode (first gaming state) in which the probability of entering the lower operating port 37 is lower than that of the upper operating port 36, and the main control device 60 is placed in the lower operating port 37 rather than the upper operating port 36. It is provided with a high-frequency support mode (second game state) in which the probability of entering a ball is high, and functions as a game state switching unit for switching between a low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode.
Specifically, the main control device 60 switches from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode after finishing the game in the open / close execution mode. Then, when the game result is "explicit small round high probability result" or "most advantageous result", the main control device 60 continues the high frequency support mode at least until it becomes "big hit winning" in the winning or losing lottery. .. Further, when the game result is "low probability result", the main control device 60 executes the game times (internal lottery) a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), and then starts from the high frequency support mode. Switch to low frequency support mode.

Therefore, if the game result is "explicit small round high probability result" or "most advantageous result", the player will be "big hit winner" at least in the winning / losing lottery after finishing the game in the open / close execution mode. Up to this point, the game round can be executed by inserting the game ball into the lower operating port 37 via the right-handed route. According to this, the player can maintain the open state of the non-electric accessory 51 at least until the "big hit win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

On the other hand, when the game result is "low probability result", the player finishes the game in the open / close execution mode and then executes the game 100 times (from the high frequency support mode). By letting the game ball enter the lower operating port 37 via the right-handed route (until it is switched to the low-frequency support mode), the game times can be executed. After that, since it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the lower operating port 37 via the right-handed route, the player can play the game by inserting the game ball into the upper operating port 36 via the left-handed route. Can be executed. Further, since the non-electric accessory 57 is arranged on the weak hitting route, the player launches the game ball on a route different from the case where the game ball is inserted into the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. As a result, the game ball can be inserted into the non-electric accessory 57. Therefore, when the non-electric accessory 57 is arranged on the weakening route, the player shifts the non-electric accessory 57 from the closed state to the open state, and then executes 100 game rounds. In addition, even if the game state is not shifted to the open / close execution mode, the game ball is not allowed to enter the non-electric accessory 57. In this case, since the non-electric accessory 57 does not shift from the open state to the closed state, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets a high-frequency support mode with no limit on the number of times and a high-frequency support mode with a limit of 100 times, so that the pachinko machine 10 has an advantageous gaming state and a disadvantageous gaming state for the player. Although the state has been created, by setting a gaming state other than these, a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player may be created. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by changing the number of game times in which the high-frequency support mode is continued after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, depending on whether or not the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by changing the number of game times in which the high-probability mode is continued after the opening / closing execution mode ends. ..

According to such an embodiment, the following actions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 temporarily enters a game ball flowing down the game area based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. A croon 53D that enables a ball is provided, and the croon 53D starts the game in the open / close execution mode when the game ball enters the ball. Therefore, the player shifts the game state to the open / close execution mode by the main control device 60, and then the player starts the game. By inserting the game ball into the crune 53D, the game in the open / close execution mode can be started. Further, when the non-electric accessory 57 is shifted from the closed state to the open state by inserting the game ball into the crune 53D, the player opens and closes the game state next time with the main control device 60. After shifting to the execution mode, the game in the opening / closing execution mode can be started by inserting the game ball into the non-electric accessory 57. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the options of the player and improve the player's attention to the game. Further, since the non-electric accessory 57 is arranged on the weak hitting route, the player launches the game ball on a route different from the case where the game ball is inserted into the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. As a result, the game ball can be inserted into the non-electric accessory 57. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can surely reflect the player's intention, and the player can comfortably play the game.

(2) After the player finishes the game in the open / close execution mode, the player goes down via the right-handed route until the game is executed 100 times (until the high frequency support mode is switched to the low frequency support mode). By inserting the game ball into the operating port 37, the game times can be executed. After that, since it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the lower operating port 37 via the right-handed route, the player can play the game by inserting the game ball into the upper operating port 36 via the left-handed route. Can be executed. Further, since the non-electric accessory 57 is arranged on the weakening route, the player shifts the non-electric accessory 57 from the closed state to the open state until the player executes 100 game times. In addition, even if the game state is not shifted to the open / close execution mode, the game ball is not allowed to enter the non-electric accessory 57. Therefore, since the non-electric accessory 57 does not shift from the open state to the closed state, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

(3) The opening / closing execution mode game that starts when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 57 and the hole 533A is larger than the opening / closing execution mode game that starts when the game ball enters the holes 533B and 533C. Since a high value is given to the player, the player expects the ball to enter the hole 533A when starting the game in the open / close execution mode by inserting the game ball into the crune 53D. .. Further, when the non-electric accessory 57 is shifted from the closed state to the open state by inserting the game ball into the crune 53D, the player opens and closes the game state next time with the main control device 60. After shifting to the execution mode, by inserting the game ball into the non-electric accessory 57, the player is given a higher value than the game in the open / close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters each of the holes 533B and 533C. It is possible to start the game of the opening / closing execution mode to be given. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the options of the player and improve the player's attention to the game.

(4) The entry of the game ball into each of the holes 533B and 533C can start the game in the open / close execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the non-electric accessory 57 and the game ball into the hole 533A can be started. The entry is from the opening / closing execution mode game that starts when the game balls enter the holes 533B and 533C by starting the opening / closing execution mode game in which more game balls can be paid out than the predetermined number of game balls. Since it also gives the player a high value, the player expects the ball to enter the hole 533A when starting the game in the open / close execution mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the game.

(5) The game state transition process is an opening / closing execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of times of opening / closing of the variable winning device 38 to a predetermined number when the game balls enter the holes 533B and 533C. By setting the number of times of opening and closing of the variable winning device 38 to be larger than the predetermined number of times when the game is started and the game ball is entered into the non-electric accessory 57 and the hole 533A, the number of times of opening and closing is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. Since the game in the open / close execution mode in which the game ball can be paid out is started, the player expects the ball to enter the hole 533A when starting the game in the open / close execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(6) Since each of the holes 533A to 533C is provided on the rolling surface 531 of the crune 53D, the player pays attention to the whereabouts of the game ball that has entered the crune 53D. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(7) The non-electric accessory 57 shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball at each blade member 571, and from the closed state by receiving the game ball at the second arm portion 576C. Since the state shifts to the open state, the open / closed state can be shifted using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other power such as electric power.

[Variation example of each embodiment]
The present invention is not limited to each of the above-described embodiments, and modifications, improvements, and the like within the range in which the object of the present invention can be achieved are included in the present invention.
(1) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 opens and closes the large winning opening 38a once for each round game. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may open and close the large winning opening 38a a plurality of times per one round game.
(2) In each of the above-described embodiments, in the pachinko machine 10, after the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state, a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses, or a game to the large winning opening 38a. When the total number of winning balls reaches a predetermined upper limit, the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit number may be changed according to the upper limit duration, and the condition for setting the opening / closing door 38b to the closed state again is arbitrary.

(3) In each of the above-described embodiments, in the pachinko machine 10, after the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state, the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a reaches eight, which is a predetermined upper limit. As a result, the opening / closing door 38b was set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, in the pachinko machine 10, the upper limit number may be set to any number other than eight. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may be set with a different upper limit number depending on the distribution result. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may be set with a different upper limit number for each round in one opening / closing execution mode.

(4) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 opens and closes when the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a reaches a predetermined upper limit after the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state. The door 38b was set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an end trigger for setting the opening / closing door 38b to the closed state when the game ball enters, and this end occurs when a predetermined time elapses. It may be configured to allow entry into the trigger.
(5) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening / closing door 38b in the open state, and then the opening / closing door 38b is closed again after a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses. Was set to. On the other hand, for example, in the pachinko machine 10, after the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state, a predetermined time elapses from the time when a prize is generated in the large winning opening 38a, so that the opening / closing door 38b is opened. It may be set to the closed state again.

(6) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening / closing door 38b to the open state and then sets the opening / closing door 38b to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may shift to the next round game without setting the opening / closing door 38b to the closed state again after setting the opening / closing door 38b to the open state.
(7) In each of the above-described embodiments, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is set shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is a time equal to or longer than the firing cycle of the game ball and is n times or less (any of n = 1, 2, 3) of the firing cycle of the game ball. It may be set to time.

(8) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of opening / closing execution modes. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has an open / close execution mode in which the round game is executed twice in the upper limit duration of the short mode, and an open / close execution mode in which the round game is executed 4 or 16 times in the upper limit duration of the long mode. Had a mode. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may have an opening / closing execution mode different from these in terms of the mode of the upper limit duration and the number of times the round game is executed. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is different in the mode of the upper limit duration, and instead of the configuration in which a plurality of types of opening / closing execution modes are set, the degree of opening of the opening / closing door 38b is different such as half-open or full-open. , A configuration in which a plurality of types of open / close execution modes are set may be used. Further, the mode of the upper limit duration may be set so that the exact upper limit duration is different although it looks the same to the player.

(9) In each of the above-described embodiments, the game result and the effect for the open / close execution mode are set in advance so as to have a one-to-one correspondence. On the other hand, for example, the effect for the open / close execution mode may be randomly selected and set from a plurality of types of effects without corresponding to the game result, and may be selected from a plurality of types of effects by lottery or the like. And the selection rate may be different depending on the game result.

(10) In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 92 is effective when the game result is one of "special deviation result", "unspecified small round high probability result", and "explicit small round high probability result". The information related to the special symbol combination was determined as the stop result to be finally displayed on the line L, and the special symbol combination was the same regardless of the type of the game result. On the other hand, the MPU 92 may randomly determine the information related to the stop result so that it is difficult for the player to grasp which game result is.

(11) In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 62 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 for the lottery for generating jackpots, and uses the jackpot type counter C2 for the lottery for the jackpot type when the jackpot occurs. On the other hand, the MPU 62 may use the jackpot random number counter C1 for the lottery of the jackpot type when the jackpot occurs. In this case, the jackpot type counter C2 may not be provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.

(12) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of deviation results, a "special deviation result" and a "normal deviation result", and the MPU 62 stores the value of a random number that wins the jackpot occurrence. By comparing the winning / failing table with the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b, the lottery for generating jackpots was executed. In other words, the MPU 62 executed the lottery related to the "special deviation result" by using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1. On the other hand, the MPU 62 uses a new counter different from the jackpot random number counter C1 provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in order to execute the lottery related to the "special deviation result", thereby causing the "special deviation". A lottery related to "result" may be executed.

(13) In each of the above-described embodiments, the value of the random number that becomes the "special deviation result" is two under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the lottery for generating the jackpot, and the jackpot occurs. Under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the value of the random number that becomes the "special deviation result" is one. In other words, the probability of a "special out-of-order result" was set to be higher in the low-probability mode than in the high-probability mode. On the other hand, the probability of "special deviation result" may be set to be lower in the low probability mode than in the high probability mode, and is set to be the same in the low probability mode and the high probability mode. It may have been done. Further, the probability of becoming a "special deviation result" may be set to be 0 in at least one of the low probability mode and the high probability mode.

(14) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 creates a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by setting the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode. By setting the state, a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player may be created. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by changing the number of game times in which the high-frequency support mode is continued after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, depending on whether or not the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by changing the number of game times in which the high-probability mode is continued after the opening / closing execution mode ends. ..

(15) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 stores the hold information related to the upper operating port 36 in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit, and stores the holding information related to the lower operating port 37 in the second result display unit. By storing in the holding area Rb, the holding information related to the upper operating port 36 and the holding information related to the lower operating port 37 were stored separately. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may store the hold information related to the upper operating port 36 and the holding information related to the lower operating port 37 together.
(16) In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 62 preferentially sets the hold information related to the lower operating port 37 for digestion of the game times regardless of whether or not there is holding information related to the upper operating port 36. .. On the other hand, the MPU 62 may set the hold information related to the upper operating port 36 and the holding information related to the lower operating port 37 for the digestion of the game times in the order of winning the respective hold information.

(17) In each of the above embodiments, the main control device 60 transmits a command to the voice emission control device 90, and the voice emission control device 90 transmits a command as a result of analyzing the command to the display control device 100. Control of the display control device 100 was being executed. On the other hand, the main control device 60 transmits a command to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 transmits a command as a result of analyzing the command to the voice emission control device 90 to control the voice emission control. Control of device 90 may be performed. The command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the voice emission control device 90 and the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 90 to the display control device 100 are not limited to the commands described in the above embodiments and are arbitrary. ..
(18) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a voice emission control device 90, and a display control device 100 as separate control devices. On the other hand, for example, the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 may be provided as the same control device, and at least one of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 is mainly used. It may be provided as the same control device as the control device 60.

(19) In each of the above-described embodiments, the symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on the winning of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. By starting the variable display of the symbol, the effect for playing the game was executed on the display screen G. On the other hand, the effect for the game round is not limited to the effect described in each of the above-described embodiments, and is arbitrary. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute the effect of playing a game by operating the movable decorative member provided on the game board 31 in combination with the symbol display device 47. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute the effect for game rotation by operating the light emitting means provided on the game board 31 in combination with the symbol display device 47. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute the effect for game rotation by operating these decorative members and light emitting means in combination with the symbol display device 47.

(20) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 executes an internal lottery (win / fail lottery and distribution lottery) based on winning a prize in the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37, and then the main display unit 45. And the symbol display device 47 executes the variation display and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37 as the stop result of the variation display. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47 start the variable display before executing the internal lottery, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed after the variable display is started. The result of may be displayed. In this case, after the variable display is started and before the variable display is stopped, the internal lottery may be executed and the stop result and the like may be set.

(21) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main display unit 45, and the main display unit 45 executes a variable display of a pattern and displays the result of an internal lottery as a stop result of the variable display. Was. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 may display the same stop result regardless of the result of the internal lottery as the stop result of the variable display, and by displaying the stop result at random, the inside The result of the lottery may not be identifiable. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 does not have to include the main display unit 45.

(22) In each of the above-described embodiments, the symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on the winning of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. By starting the variable display of the symbol, the effect for playing the game was executed on the display screen G. On the other hand, the symbol display device 47 may execute the effect for the game round on the display screen G by displaying the symbol (design) that clearly indicates the result of the internal lottery.

For example, the symbol display device 47 sets a predetermined region in at least one of a region narrower than the region for displaying the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the peripheral region of the region for displaying the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. When the variable display of the symbols in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is stopped, a symbol that clearly indicates the result of the internal lottery may be displayed in this predetermined area. The symbols to be displayed in the predetermined area may be displayed in a variable manner or may be hidden during the variable display of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

Here, as the pattern to be displayed in the predetermined area, characters, colors, and patterns that are difficult for the player to identify may be adopted, or a combination thereof may be adopted. Further, it may be difficult for the player to identify by adopting characters, colors, or patterns that are not easily identified by the player, but are similar to each other or a combination thereof. According to this, for example, at the end of the game round, the manager of the pachinko / pachislot machine may win the lottery for the occurrence of a big hit by visually observing the symbol display device 47 without visually observing the main display unit 45. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not a fraudulent act is performed to cause the pachinko machine 10 to perform the above behavior.

(23) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to operate independently, but may be configured to transmit and receive information by interlocking with an external device such as a mobile phone. .. For example, the gaming machine is configured so that the player can output the optical code by operating a button or the like provided on the gaming machine, and the information of the optical code is transmitted to the camera provided on the mobile phone or the like. The gaming machine may be configured so that the information of the gaming machine can be transmitted to the web server by capturing the image, reading the image, and accessing the website. In addition, the gaming machine is configured so that the information of the web server can be received by the player entering the password issued by accessing the website into the gaming machine by operating the buttons provided on the gaming machine. You may.

(24) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has been illustrated and described as the gaming machine of the present invention. On the other hand, the gaming machine of the present invention may be another type of pachinko machine different from the pachinko machine 10. For example, in the gaming machine of the present invention, when a gaming ball enters a specific area, It may be a pachinko machine that opens an electric accessory a predetermined number of times, or a pachinko machine that generates a jackpot right when a game ball enters a specific area. Further, the gaming machine of the present invention may be an arrangement ball machine or another type of gaming machine such as a sparrow ball.

[Invention group extracted from each embodiment]
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments will be described. Among the features of the present invention group, the configurations corresponding to each of the above-described embodiments are shown in parentheses, but the features of the present invention group are not limited to the above-mentioned respective embodiments, and the features of the present invention group are characterized. Deformations, improvements, etc. within the range in which the object can be achieved, and combinations of each feature are included in the features of the present invention group.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board and a game ball flowing down the game area are inserted, and an internal lottery is held when the game ball is entered. It is advantageous for the player based on the results of the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) to be executed and the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entering means. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) including a gaming state transition means (main control device 60) that shifts the gaming state to a specific control state.
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is entered and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter. Inverted ball entry means (non-electric accessory 51) to shift,
A variable ball entry means (Crune 53) that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to be temporarily entered based on the result of an internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the start entry means. ) And
The variable ball entry means
A first ball entry portion (hole 533B,) that allows the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means to enter the ball and does not shift the inverted ball entry means from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters the ball. 533C) and
A second ball entry portion (hole 533A) that causes the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means to enter the ball and shifts the inverted ball entry means from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters the ball. With and
The game state transition means
After shifting the gaming state to the specific control state, the specific control state occurs when the game ball enters any of the inverted ball entry means, the first ball entry section, and the second ball entry section. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a specific control start unit (game state transition process) for starting the game.

According to the feature A1 of the present invention group, the gaming machine temporarily moves the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entering means. Since the variable ball entry means is provided with the variable ball entry means capable of entering the ball, the variable ball entry means includes a first entry section and a second entry section for starting the game in the specific control state when the game ball is entered. , The player shifts the gaming state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, and then causes the game ball to enter the first ball entry section or the second entry section to play the game in the specific control state. Can be started. Further, since the second ball entry unit shifts the reverse ball entry means from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters the ball, the player identifies the game state next time by the game state transition means. After shifting to the control state, the game in the specific control state can be started by inserting the game ball into the reverse ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can expand the choices of the player and can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature A2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A1 of the present invention group,
The game in the specific control state, which starts when the game ball enters the reversing ball entry means and the second ball entry section, starts when the game ball enters the first ball entry section. A gaming machine characterized by giving a player a higher value than a controlled gaming game.

According to the feature A2 of the present invention group, the game in the specific control state started when the game ball enters the reversing ball entry means and the second entry section is the entry of the game ball into the first entry section. Since the player is given a higher value than the game in the specific control state that starts at the time of the ball, the player can start the game in the specific control state by inserting the game ball into the variable ball entry means. , You will expect to enter the second ball entry section. Further, when the reversing ball entering means is shifted from the closed state to the open state triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry portion, the player uses the game state transition means to change the gaming state. After shifting to the next specific control state, by letting the game ball enter the reversing ball entry means, the value is higher than the game in the specific control state that starts when the game ball enters the first entry portion. It is possible to start the game in the specific control state given to the player. Therefore, the gaming machine can expand the choices of the player and can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature A3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A2 of the present invention group,
The specific control start unit starts a game in the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out when the game ball enters the first ball entry unit, and the reverse ball entry means and the second ball entry means. By starting the game in the specific control state in which more game balls can be paid out than the predetermined number of game balls when the game balls enter the ball entry section, the game balls enter the first ball entry section. A gaming machine characterized in that a player is given a higher value than the gaming in the specific controlled state that starts when the ball enters the ball.

According to the feature A3 of the present invention group, the entry of the game ball into the first entry portion can start the game in the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the reverse entry means and The entry of the game ball into the second entry section is performed by starting a game in a specific control state in which more game balls can be paid out than a predetermined number of game balls. Since the player is given a higher value than the game in the specific control state that is started at the time of entering the ball, the player is required to enter the second ball entry portion when starting the game in the specific control state. You will expect it. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature A4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A3 of the present invention group,
An open / closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is allowed to enter, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter, and a predetermined game ball is paid out when the game ball enters. Equipped with means (variable winning device 38)
The specific control start unit is
After the opening / closing ball entry means is set to the open state and then set to the closed state again, the game (round game) in the specific control state is defined as one game.
The specific control start unit is
By setting the number of times of opening and closing of the opening / closing ball entering means to a predetermined number of times, the game in the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out is started, and the number of times of opening / closing of the opening / closing ball entering means is made larger than the predetermined number of times. A gaming machine characterized in that by setting the number of times of the above, a game in the specific controlled state is started, in which more gaming balls can be paid out than the predetermined number of gaming balls.

According to the feature A4 of the present invention group, the specific control start unit sets a predetermined number of times of opening and closing of the opening / closing ball entry means when the game ball enters the first ball entry unit, thereby performing a predetermined number of games. The game in the specific control state in which the ball can be paid out is started, and the opening / closing number of times of opening / closing the opening / closing ball entry means is set to a larger number than the predetermined number of times when the game ball enters the reverse ball entry means and the second entry portion. As a result, a game in a specific control state in which more game balls can be paid out than a predetermined number of game balls is started. Therefore, when starting a game in the specific control state, the player goes to the second entry section. You will expect the ball to enter. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature A5.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features A1 to A4 of the present invention group.
The variable ball entry means
A crune (cruin 53) having a rolling surface (rolling surface 531) for rolling a game ball that has entered the variable ball entering means is provided.
A gaming machine characterized in that the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section are provided on the rolling surface and allow a gaming ball that rolls on the rolling surface to enter the ball.

According to the feature A5 of the present invention group, since the first entry portion and the second entry portion are provided on the rolling surface of the crune, the player can enter the variable ball entry means. You will pay attention to the whereabouts of the ball. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature A6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features A1 to A5 of the present invention group.
The inverted ball entry means
A first receiving portion (each plate-shaped body 513) that receives a game ball that has entered the inverted ball entering means, and
A second receiving portion (each lower blade member 515) for receiving a game ball that has entered the second entering portion is provided.
By receiving the game ball at the first receiving part, the state shifts from the open state to the closed state, and by receiving the game ball at the second receiving part, the state shifts from the closed state to the open state. A game machine to be.

According to the feature A6 of the present invention group, the reversing ball entering means shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball at the first receiving part, and receives the game ball at the second receiving part. As a result, the closed state is changed to the open state, so that the open / closed state can be changed using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other power such as electric power.

Feature A7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features A1 to A6 of the present invention group.
The starting ball entry means
It is provided with a first starting ball entry section (upper operating port 36) and a second starting ball entry section (lower operating port 37).
The gaming machine
A first route (left-handed route) in which it is easy to generate a game ball into the first start ball entry portion and it is difficult to generate a game ball into the second start ball entry portion.
A second route (right-handed route) in which it is easy to generate a game ball into the second start ball entry portion and it is difficult to generate a game ball into the first start ball entry portion.
The inversion ball entry means arranged in the first path is provided.
The game state transition means
A first gaming state (low frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball is lower than that of the first starting ball.
A second gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball entering portion is higher than that of the first starting ball entering portion.
A game state switching unit (main control device 60) for switching between the first game state and the second game state is provided.
After finishing the game in the specific control state, the game state switching unit switches from the first game state to the second game state, executes an internal lottery a predetermined number of times, and then performs the second game state. A gaming machine characterized by switching from the first to the first gaming state.

According to the feature A7 of the present invention group, after the player finishes the game in the specific control state, until the player executes the internal lottery a predetermined number of times (until the player switches from the second game state to the first game state). The internal lottery can be executed by letting the game ball enter the second starting ball entry portion via the second path. After that, since it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting ball entry portion via the second path, the player causes the game ball to enter the first starting ball entry section via the first path. By doing so, the internal lottery can be executed. Therefore, when the reverse ball entry means is arranged in the first path, the player shifts the reverse ball entry means from the closed state to the open state and then executes the internal lottery a predetermined number of times. If the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the game ball will be entered into the inverted ball entry means via the first path. In this case, the reversing ball entry means shifts from the open state to the closed state, so that the player shifts the gaming state to the specific control state by the time the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times. You can play the game with the expectation that it will be done.

Feature A8.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features A1 to A6 of the present invention group.
The starting ball entry means
It is provided with a first starting ball entry section (upper operating port 36) and a second starting ball entry section (lower operating port 37).
The gaming machine
A first route (left-handed route) in which it is easy to generate a game ball into the first start ball entry portion and it is difficult to generate a game ball into the second start ball entry portion.
A second route (right-handed route) in which it is easy to generate a game ball into the second start ball entry portion and it is difficult to generate a game ball into the first start ball entry portion.
The first path and the reverse ball entry means arranged in a third path (weak hitting route) different from the second path are provided.
The game state transition means
A first gaming state (low frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball is lower than that of the first starting ball.
A second gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball entering portion is higher than that of the first starting ball entering portion.
A game state switching unit (main control device 60) for switching between the first game state and the second game state is provided.
After finishing the game in the specific control state, the game state switching unit switches from the first game state to the second game state, executes an internal lottery a predetermined number of times, and then performs the second game state. A gaming machine characterized by switching from the first to the first gaming state.

According to the feature A8 of the present invention group, after the player finishes the game in the specific control state, until the player executes the internal lottery a predetermined number of times (until the player switches from the second game state to the first game state). The internal lottery can be executed by letting the game ball enter the second starting ball entry portion via the second path. After that, since it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting ball entry portion via the second path, the player causes the game ball to enter the first starting ball entry section via the first path. By doing so, the internal lottery can be executed. Further, when the reverse ball entry means is arranged in the third path, the player shifts the reverse ball entry means from the closed state to the open state and then executes the internal lottery a predetermined number of times. , Even if the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the game ball is not allowed to enter the reverse ball entry means. In this case, since the reversing ball entry means does not shift from the open state to the closed state, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

According to the feature A group of the present invention as described above, the player's choices can be expanded and the player's attention to the game can be improved, so that the following problems can be solved. ..

Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board is provided, and the game ball enters the operating port (starting ball entry means) to perform an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery. The gaming machine to run is known. When, for example, the gaming machine wins the jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.

However, after shifting the gaming state to the specific control state, the gaming machine follows the same flow regardless of whether or not the player's action is intervened, and then starts the game in the specific control state. There is a problem that the series of flow from shifting the game state to starting the game in the specific control state becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game decreases.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area, and an internal lottery for entering the game ball. It is advantageous for the player based on the results of the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) to be executed and the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entering means. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) including a gaming state transition means (main control device 60) that shifts the gaming state to a specific control state.
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is entered and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter. Inverted ball entry means (non-electric accessory 51) to shift,
A variable ball entry means (Crune 53A) that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to be temporarily entered based on the result of an internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the start entry means. And the first crune 55)
The variable ball entry means
A ball entry portion (each hole 533A to 533C, 553A, 553B) for inserting a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means, and
An opening / closing lottery section (rotating body 537, saucer 538, and second crune) that draws a lottery as to whether or not to shift the inverted ball entry means from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters the ball entry section. 56) and
The game state transition means
After shifting the gaming state to the specific control state, the specific control start unit (game state transition process) that starts the game in the specific control state when the game ball enters the reversing ball entry means and the ball entry section. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature B1 of the present invention group, the gaming machine temporarily moves the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entering means. A variable ball-entry means that enables ball entry is provided, and the variable ball-entry means is provided with a ball-entry portion that starts a game in a specific control state when the game ball enters, so that the player can use the game state transition means. After shifting the game state to the specific control state, the game in the specific control state can be started by inserting the game ball into the ball entry portion. Further, since the variable ball entry means is provided with an opening / closing lottery section that draws a lottery as to whether or not to shift the reverse ball entry means from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters the ball entry section. When the lottery executed by the opening / closing lottery section is won and the reversing ball entry means is shifted from the closed state to the open state, the player uses the game state transition means to change the game state to the next specific control state. After shifting to, the game in the specific control state can be started by inserting the game ball into the reverse ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can expand the choices of the player and can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B1 of the present invention group,
The variable ball entry means
A plurality of ball entry sections including a first ball entry section (holes 533B, 533C, 553B) and a second ball entry section (holes 533A, 553A) are provided.
The game in the specific control state, which starts when the game ball enters the reversing ball entry means and the second ball entry section, starts when the game ball enters the first ball entry section. A gaming machine characterized by giving a player a higher value than a controlled gaming game.

According to the feature B2 of the present invention group, the game in the specific control state started when the game ball enters the reversing ball entry means and the second entry section is the entry of the game ball into the first entry section. Since the player is given a higher value than the game in the specific control state that starts at the time of the ball, the player can start the game in the specific control state by inserting the game ball into the variable ball entry means. , You will expect to enter the second ball entry section. In addition, when the lottery executed by the opening / closing lottery section is won and the reverse ball entry means is shifted from the closed state to the open state, the player identifies the game state next time by the game state transition means. After shifting to the control state, by inserting the game ball into the reversing ball entry means, the player is given a higher value than the game in the specific control state that starts when the game ball enters the first entry portion. It is possible to start the game of the specific control state to be given. Therefore, the gaming machine can expand the choices of the player and can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B2 of the present invention group,
The specific control start unit starts a game in the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out when the game ball enters the first ball entry unit, and the reverse ball entry means and the second ball entry means. By starting the game in the specific control state in which more game balls can be paid out than the predetermined number of game balls when the game balls enter the ball entry section, the game balls enter the first ball entry section. A gaming machine characterized in that a player is given a higher value than the gaming in the specific controlled state that starts when the ball enters the ball.

According to the feature B3 of the present invention group, the entry of the game ball into the second entry portion can start the game in the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the reverse entry means and The entry of a game ball into the second entry section is performed by starting a game in a specific controlled state in which more game balls can be paid out than a predetermined number of game balls. Since the player is given a higher value than the game in the specific control state that is started at the time of entering the ball, the player is required to enter the second ball entry portion when starting the game in the specific control state. You will expect it. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B3 of the present invention group,
An open / closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is allowed to enter, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter, and a predetermined game ball is paid out when the game ball enters. Equipped with means (variable winning device 38)
The specific control start unit is
After the opening / closing ball entry means is set to the open state and then set to the closed state again, the game (round game) in the specific control state is defined as one game.
The specific control start unit is
By setting the number of times of opening and closing of the opening / closing ball entering means to a predetermined number of times, the game in the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out is started, and the number of times of opening / closing of the opening / closing ball entering means is made larger than the predetermined number of times. A gaming machine characterized in that by setting the number of times of the above, a game in the specific controlled state is started, in which more gaming balls can be paid out than the predetermined number of gaming balls.

According to the feature B4 of the present invention group, the specific control start unit sets a predetermined number of times of opening and closing of the opening / closing ball entry means when the game ball enters the first ball entry unit, thereby performing a predetermined number of games. The game in the specific control state in which the ball can be paid out is started, and the number of times of opening and closing of the opening / closing ball entering means is set to be larger than the predetermined number of times when the game ball is entered into the reversing ball entering means and the second ball entering portion. As a result, a game in a specific control state in which more game balls can be paid out than a predetermined number of game balls is started. Therefore, when starting a game in the specific control state, the player goes to the second entry section. You will expect the ball to enter. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B5.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features B2 to B4 of the present invention group.
The variable ball entry means
A crune (crun 53A and a first crune 55) having a rolling surface (rolling surface 531) for rolling a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means is provided.
A gaming machine characterized in that the plurality of ball entry portions are provided on the rolling surface and a game ball that rolls on the rolling surface is inserted.

According to the feature B5 of the present invention group, since a plurality of ball entry portions are provided on the rolling surface of the crune, the player pays attention to the whereabouts of the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means. Become. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B6.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B5 of the present invention group,
The rolling surface is
It is provided with the plurality of ball entry portions formed at a predetermined distance from the center of the rolling surface and at equal intervals with each other.
The opening / closing lottery section
A rotating body (rotating body 537) that rotates about an axis passing through the center of the rolling surface and allows a game ball that has entered the plurality of ball entry portions to enter the ball is provided.
The rotating body is
It is formed at a position corresponding to each of the plurality of ball entry portions, and is provided with a plurality of rotating body passages (rotating body passages 537C1 to 537C3) for guiding the game balls that have entered the plurality of ball entry portions.
The plurality of rotating body passages
A first rotating body passage (rotating body passage 537C2, 537C3) that does not shift the inverted ball entering means from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters.
A gaming machine including a second rotating body passage (rotating body passage 537C1) that shifts the inverted ball entering means from a closed state to an open state when the gaming ball enters a ball.

According to the feature B6 of the present invention group, the opening / closing lottery section includes a rotating body that rotates about an axis passing through the center of the rolling surface and receives a game ball that has entered a plurality of ball entry sections. The rotating body has a first rotating body passage that does not shift the reversing ball entering means from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters, and the reversing ball entering means from the closed state when the game ball enters. It is provided with a second rotating body passage that shifts to an open state. According to this, the opening / closing lottery unit independently closes the reversing ball entry means from the closed state without being affected by the crune having a plurality of ball entry sections that start the game in the specific control state when the game ball enters. It is possible to draw a lottery as to whether or not to shift to the open state. In addition, when the reversing ball entry means is shifted from the closed state to the open state by entering the game ball that has entered the plurality of entry portions into the second rotating body passage of the rotating body, the game is played. After shifting the game state to the next specific control state by the game state transition means, the person enters the game ball into the reversing ball entry means when the game ball enters the first ball entry section. It is possible to start a game in a specific control state that gives the player a higher value than the game in the specific control state to be started. Therefore, the gaming machine can expand the choices of the player and can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B7.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B5 of the present invention group,
The opening / closing lottery section
A lottery crune (second crune 56) having a lottery rolling surface (rolling surface 561) for rolling a game ball that has entered the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section is provided.
The lottery crew
It is provided on the lottery rolling surface, and is provided with a plurality of lottery ball entry portions (each hole 563A to 563C) for entering a game ball that rolls on the lottery rolling surface.
The plurality of lottery entry sections
A first lottery ball entry section (holes 563B, 563C) that does not shift the inverted ball entry means from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters the ball.
A gaming machine characterized in that a second lottery entry portion (hole 563A) for shifting the reverse entry means from a closed state to an open state when a game ball enters is provided.

According to the feature B7 of the present invention group, the opening / closing lottery section includes a first lottery ball entry section that does not shift the reverse ball entry means from the closed state to the open state when the game ball enters the ball, and the game ball. It is provided with a lottery crew having a second lottery ball entry section that shifts the reverse ball entry means from the closed state to the open state when the ball enters. According to this, the opening / closing lottery section is independent without being affected by the first ball entry section and the crune having the second entry section that starts the game in the specific control state when the game ball enters the ball. It is possible to draw a lottery whether or not to shift the reverse ball entry means from the closed state to the open state. Further, by letting the game ball that has entered the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section enter the second lottery entry section, the reverse ball entry means is shifted from the closed state to the open state. In that case, the player shifts the game state to the next specific control state by the game state transition means, and then causes the game ball to enter the reverse ball entry means to the first entry portion. It is possible to start a game in a specific control state that gives a player a higher value than a game in the specific control state that starts when the game ball enters the ball. Therefore, the gaming machine can expand the choices of the player and can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B8.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features B1 to B7 of the present invention group.
The inverted ball entry means
A first receiving portion (each plate-shaped body 513) that receives a game ball that has entered the inverted ball entering means, and
A second receiving portion (each lower blade member 515) for receiving a game ball that has entered the second entering portion is provided.
By receiving the game ball at the first receiving part, the state shifts from the open state to the closed state, and by receiving the game ball at the second receiving part, the state shifts from the closed state to the open state. A game machine to be.

According to the feature B8 of the present invention group, the reversing ball entering means shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball at the first receiving part, and receives the game ball at the second receiving part. As a result, the closed state is changed to the open state, so that the open / closed state can be changed using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other power such as electric power.

Feature B9.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features B1 to B8 of the present invention group.
The starting ball entry means
It is provided with a first starting ball entry section (upper operating port 36) and a second starting ball entry section (lower operating port 37).
The gaming machine
A first route (left-handed route) in which it is easy to generate a game ball into the first start ball entry portion and it is difficult to generate a game ball into the second start ball entry portion.
A second route (right-handed route) in which it is easy to generate a game ball into the second start ball entry portion and it is difficult to generate a game ball into the first start ball entry portion.
The inversion ball entry means arranged in the first path is provided.
The game state transition means
A first gaming state (low frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball is lower than that of the first starting ball.
A second gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball entering portion is higher than that of the first starting ball entering portion.
A game state switching unit (main control device 60) for switching between the first game state and the second game state is provided.
After finishing the game in the specific control state, the game state switching unit switches from the first game state to the second game state, executes an internal lottery a predetermined number of times, and then performs the second game state. A gaming machine characterized by switching from the first to the first gaming state.

According to the feature B9 of the present invention group, after the player finishes the game in the specific control state, until the player executes the internal lottery a predetermined number of times (until the player switches from the second game state to the first game state). The internal lottery can be executed by letting the game ball enter the second starting ball entry portion via the second path. After that, since it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting ball entry portion via the second path, the player causes the game ball to enter the first starting ball entry section via the first path. By doing so, the internal lottery can be executed. Therefore, when the reverse ball entry means is arranged in the first path, the player shifts the reverse ball entry means from the closed state to the open state and then executes the internal lottery a predetermined number of times. If the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the game ball will be entered into the inverted ball entry means via the first path. In this case, the reversing ball entry means shifts from the open state to the closed state, so that the player shifts the gaming state to the specific control state by the time the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times. You can play the game with the expectation that it will be done.

Feature B10.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features B1 to B8 of the present invention group.
The starting ball entry means
It is provided with a first starting ball entry section (upper operating port 36) and a second starting ball entry section (lower operating port 37).
The gaming machine
A first route (left-handed route) in which it is easy to generate a game ball into the first start ball entry portion and it is difficult to generate a game ball into the second start ball entry portion.
A second route (right-handed route) in which it is easy to generate a game ball into the second start ball entry portion and it is difficult to generate a game ball into the first start ball entry portion.
The first path and the reverse ball entry means arranged in a third path (weak hitting route) different from the second path are provided.
The game state transition means
A first gaming state (low frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball is lower than that of the first starting ball.
A second gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball entering portion is higher than that of the first starting ball entering portion.
A game state switching unit (main control device 60) for switching between the first game state and the second game state is provided.
After finishing the game in the specific control state, the game state switching unit switches from the first game state to the second game state, executes an internal lottery a predetermined number of times, and then performs the second game state. A gaming machine characterized by switching from the first to the first gaming state.

According to the feature B10 of the present invention group, after the player finishes the game in the specific control state, until the player executes the internal lottery a predetermined number of times (until the player switches from the second game state to the first game state). The internal lottery can be executed by letting the game ball enter the second starting ball entry portion via the second path. After that, since it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting ball entry portion via the second path, the player causes the game ball to enter the first starting ball entry section via the first path. By doing so, the internal lottery can be executed. Further, when the reverse ball entry means is arranged in the third path, the player shifts the reverse ball entry means from the closed state to the open state and then executes the internal lottery a predetermined number of times. , Even if the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the game ball is not allowed to enter the reverse ball entry means. In this case, since the reversing ball entry means does not shift from the open state to the closed state, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

According to the feature B group of the present invention as described above, the player's choices can be expanded and the player's attention to the game can be improved, so that the following problems can be solved. ..

Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board is provided, and the game ball enters the operating port (starting ball entry means) to perform an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery. The gaming machine to run is known. When, for example, the gaming machine wins the jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.

However, after shifting the gaming state to the specific control state, the gaming machine follows the same flow regardless of whether or not the player's action is intervened, and then starts the game in the specific control state. There is a problem that the series of flow from shifting the game state to starting the game in the specific control state becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game decreases.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area, and an internal lottery for entering the game ball. It is advantageous for the player based on the results of the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) to be executed and the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entering means. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) including a gaming state transition means (main control device 60) that shifts the gaming state to a specific control state.
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is entered and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter. Inverted ball entry means (non-electric accessory 51) to shift,
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means, the game ball flowing down the game area can be temporarily entered, and the game ball can be entered. It is equipped with a variable ball entry means (Crune 53C) that shifts the reverse ball entry means from the closed state to the open state.
The game state transition means
After shifting the gaming state to the specific control state, a specific control start unit (game state transition process) that starts the game in the specific control state when the game ball enters the inverted ball entry means and the variable ball entry means. ) Is provided.

According to the feature C1 of the present invention group, the gaming machine temporarily moves the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entering means. A variable ball-entry means that enables ball entry is provided, and the variable ball-entry means starts a game in a specific control state when the game ball enters the ball. Therefore, the player can use the game state transition means to determine the game state in the specific control state. After shifting to, the game in the specific control state can be started by inserting the game ball into the variable ball entry means. In addition, when the inverted ball entering means is shifted from the closed state to the open state by inserting the game ball into the variable ball entering means, the player uses the game state transition means to change the gaming state to the next time. After shifting to the specific control state, the game in the specific control state can be started by inserting the game ball into the reversing ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can expand the choices of the player and can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C1 of the present invention group,
The variable ball entry means
A first ball entry section (each hole 533B, 533C) and a second ball entry section (hole 533A) for inserting a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means are provided.
The game state transition means starts the game in the specific control state when the game ball enters the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section.
The game in the specific control state, which starts when the game ball enters the reversing ball entry means and the second ball entry section, starts when the game ball enters the first ball entry section. A gaming machine characterized by giving a player a higher value than a controlled gaming game.

According to the feature C2 of the present invention group, the game in the specific control state started when the game ball enters the reversing ball entry means and the second entry section is the entry of the game ball into the first entry section. Since the player is given a higher value than the game in the specific control state that starts at the time of the ball, the player can start the game in the specific control state by inserting the game ball into the variable ball entry means. , You will expect to enter the second ball entry section. Further, when the reversing ball entering means is shifted from the closed state to the open state by inserting the game ball into the variable ball entering means, the player uses the game state transition means to change the gaming state to the next time. After shifting to the specific control state, by letting the game ball enter the reversing ball entry means, the player has a higher value than the game in the specific control state that starts when the game ball enters the first entry portion. It is possible to start the game in the specific control state given to. Therefore, the gaming machine can expand the choices of the player and can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C2 of the present invention group,
The specific control start unit starts a game in the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out when the game ball enters the first ball entry unit, and the reverse ball entry means and the second ball entry means. By starting the game in the specific control state in which more game balls can be paid out than the predetermined number of game balls when the game balls enter the ball entry section, the game balls enter the first ball entry section. A gaming machine characterized in that a player is given a higher value than the gaming in the specific controlled state that starts when the ball enters the ball.

According to the feature C3 of the present invention group, the entry of the game ball into the second entry portion can start the game in the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the reverse entry means and The entry of a game ball into the second entry section is performed by starting a game in a specific controlled state in which more game balls can be paid out than a predetermined number of game balls. Since the player is given a higher value than the game in the specific control state that is started at the time of entering the ball, the player is required to enter the second ball entry portion when starting the game in the specific control state. You will expect it. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C3 of the present invention group,
An open / closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is allowed to enter, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter, and a predetermined game ball is paid out when the game ball enters. Equipped with means (variable winning device 38)
The specific control start unit is
After the opening / closing ball entry means is set to the open state and then set to the closed state again, the game (round game) in the specific control state is defined as one game.
The specific control start unit is
By setting the number of times of opening and closing of the opening / closing ball entering means to a predetermined number of times, the game in the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out is started, and the number of times of opening / closing of the opening / closing ball entering means is made larger than the predetermined number of times. A gaming machine characterized in that by setting the number of times of the above, a game in the specific controlled state is started, in which more gaming balls can be paid out than the predetermined number of gaming balls.

According to the feature C4 of the present invention group, the specific control start unit sets a predetermined number of times of opening and closing of the opening / closing ball entry means when the game ball enters the first ball entry unit, thereby performing a predetermined number of games. The game in the specific control state in which the ball can be paid out is started, and the number of times of opening and closing of the opening / closing ball entering means is set to be larger than the predetermined number of times when the game ball is entered into the reversing ball entering means and the second ball entering portion. As a result, a game in a specific control state in which more game balls can be paid out than a predetermined number of game balls is started. Therefore, when starting a game in the specific control state, the player goes to the second entry section. You will expect the ball to enter. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C5.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features C2 to C4 of the present invention group.
The variable ball entry means
A crune (cruin 53C) having a rolling surface (rolling surface 531) for rolling a game ball that has entered the variable ball entering means is provided.
A gaming machine characterized in that the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section are provided on the rolling surface and allow a gaming ball that rolls on the rolling surface to enter the ball.

According to the feature C5 of the present invention group, since the first entry portion and the second entry portion are provided on the rolling surface of the crune, the player can enter the variable ball entry means. You will pay attention to the whereabouts of the ball. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features C1 to C5 of the present invention group.
The inverted ball entry means
A first receiving portion (each plate-shaped body 513) that receives a game ball that has entered the inverted ball entering means, and
A second receiving portion (each lower blade member 515) for receiving a game ball that has entered the second entering portion is provided.
By receiving the game ball at the first receiving part, the state shifts from the open state to the closed state, and by receiving the game ball at the second receiving part, the state shifts from the closed state to the open state. A game machine to be.

According to the feature C6 of the present invention group, the reversing ball entering means shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball at the first receiving part, and receives the game ball at the second receiving part. As a result, the closed state is changed to the open state, so that the open / closed state can be changed using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other power such as electric power.

Feature C7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features C1 to C6 of the present invention group.
The starting ball entry means
It is provided with a first starting ball entry section (upper operating port 36) and a second starting ball entry section (lower operating port 37).
The gaming machine
A first route (left-handed route) in which it is easy to generate a game ball into the first start ball entry portion and it is difficult to generate a game ball into the second start ball entry portion.
A second route (right-handed route) in which it is easy to generate a game ball into the second start ball entry portion and it is difficult to generate a game ball into the first start ball entry portion.
The inversion ball entry means arranged in the first path is provided.
The game state transition means
A first gaming state (low frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball is lower than that of the first starting ball.
A second gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball entering portion is higher than that of the first starting ball entering portion.
A game state switching unit (main control device 60) for switching between the first game state and the second game state is provided.
After finishing the game in the specific control state, the game state switching unit switches from the first game state to the second game state, executes an internal lottery a predetermined number of times, and then performs the second game state. A gaming machine characterized by switching from the first to the first gaming state.

According to the feature C7 of the present invention group, after the player finishes the game in the specific control state, until the player executes the internal lottery a predetermined number of times (until the player switches from the second game state to the first game state). The internal lottery can be executed by letting the game ball enter the second starting ball entry portion via the second path. After that, since it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting ball entry portion via the second path, the player causes the game ball to enter the first starting ball entry section via the first path. By doing so, the internal lottery can be executed. Therefore, when the reverse ball entry means is arranged in the first path, the player shifts the reverse ball entry means from the closed state to the open state and then executes the internal lottery a predetermined number of times. If the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the game ball will be entered into the inverted ball entry means via the first path. In this case, the reversing ball entry means shifts from the open state to the closed state, so that the player shifts the gaming state to the specific control state by the time the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times. You can play the game with the expectation that it will be done.

Feature C8.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features C1 to C6 of the present invention group.
The starting ball entry means
It is provided with a first starting ball entry section (upper operating port 36) and a second starting ball entry section (lower operating port 37).
The gaming machine
A first route (left-handed route) in which it is easy to generate a game ball into the first start ball entry portion and it is difficult to generate a game ball into the second start ball entry portion.
A second route (right-handed route) in which it is easy to generate a game ball into the second start ball entry portion and it is difficult to generate a game ball into the first start ball entry portion.
The first path and the reverse ball entry means arranged in a third path (weak hitting route) different from the second path are provided.
The game state transition means
A first gaming state (low frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball is lower than that of the first starting ball.
A second gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball entering portion is higher than that of the first starting ball entering portion.
A game state switching unit (main control device 60) for switching between the first game state and the second game state is provided.
After finishing the game in the specific control state, the game state switching unit switches from the first game state to the second game state, executes an internal lottery a predetermined number of times, and then performs the second game state. A gaming machine characterized by switching from the first to the first gaming state.

According to the feature C8 of the present invention group, after the player finishes the game in the specific control state, until the player executes the internal lottery a predetermined number of times (until the player switches from the second game state to the first game state). The internal lottery can be executed by letting the game ball enter the second starting ball entry portion via the second path. After that, since it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting ball entry portion via the second path, the player causes the game ball to enter the first starting ball entry section via the first path. By doing so, the internal lottery can be executed. Further, when the reverse ball entry means is arranged in the third path, the player shifts the reverse ball entry means from the closed state to the open state and then executes the internal lottery a predetermined number of times. , Even if the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the game ball is not allowed to enter the reverse ball entry means. In this case, since the reversing ball entry means does not shift from the open state to the closed state, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

According to the feature C group of the present invention as described above, the player's choices can be expanded and the player's attention to the game can be improved, so that the following problems can be solved. ..

Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board is provided, and the game ball enters the operating port (starting ball entry means) to perform an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery. The gaming machine to run is known. When, for example, the gaming machine wins the jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.

However, after shifting the gaming state to the specific control state, the gaming machine follows the same flow regardless of whether or not the player's action is intervened, and then starts the game in the specific control state. There is a problem that the series of flow from shifting the game state to starting the game in the specific control state becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game decreases.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area, and an internal lottery for entering the game ball. It is advantageous for the player based on the results of the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) to be executed and the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entering means. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) including a gaming state transition means (main control device 60) that shifts the gaming state to a specific control state.
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is entered and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter. Inverted ball entry means (non-electric accessory 57) to shift, and
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means, the game ball flowing down the game area can be temporarily entered, and the game ball can be entered. It is equipped with a variable ball entry means (Crune 53D) that shifts the reverse ball entry means from the closed state to the open state.
The starting ball entry means
It is provided with a first starting ball entry section (upper operating port 36) and a second starting ball entry section (lower operating port 37).
The gaming machine
A first route (left-handed route) in which it is easy to generate a game ball into the first start ball entry portion and it is difficult to generate a game ball into the second start ball entry portion.
A second route (right-handed route) in which it is easy to generate a game ball into the second start ball entry portion and it is difficult to generate a game ball into the first start ball entry portion.
The first path and the reverse ball entry means arranged in a third path (weak hitting route) different from the second path are provided.
The game state transition means
After shifting the gaming state to the specific control state, a specific control start unit (game state transition process) that starts the game in the specific control state when the game ball enters the inverted ball entry means and the variable ball entry means. ) Is provided.

According to the feature D1 of the present invention group, the gaming machine temporarily moves the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entering means. A variable ball-entry means that enables ball entry is provided, and the variable ball-entry means starts a game in a specific control state when the game ball enters the ball. Therefore, the player uses the game state transition means to determine the game state in the specific control state. After shifting to, the game in the specific control state can be started by inserting the game ball into the variable ball entry means. In addition, when the inverted ball entering means is shifted from the closed state to the open state by inserting the game ball into the variable ball entering means, the player uses the game state transition means to change the gaming state to the next time. After shifting to the specific control state, the game in the specific control state can be started by inserting the game ball into the reversing ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can expand the choices of the player and can improve the player's attention to the game. Further, since the reverse ball entry means is arranged in the third path, the player can reverse the ball by launching the game ball in a path different from the case where the game ball is entered into the start ball entry means. A game ball can be inserted into the ball means. Therefore, the gaming machine can surely reflect the intention of the player, and the player can comfortably play the game.

Feature D2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D1 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means
A first gaming state (low frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball is lower than that of the first starting ball.
A second gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball entering portion is higher than that of the first starting ball entering portion.
A game state switching unit (main control device 60) for switching between the first game state and the second game state is provided.
After finishing the game in the specific control state, the game state switching unit switches from the first game state to the second game state, executes an internal lottery a predetermined number of times, and then performs the second game state. A gaming machine characterized by switching from the first to the first gaming state.

According to the feature D2 of the present invention group, after the player finishes the game in the specific control state, until the player executes the internal lottery a predetermined number of times (until the player switches from the second game state to the first game state). The internal lottery can be executed by letting the game ball enter the second starting ball entry portion via the second path. After that, since it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting ball entry portion via the second path, the player causes the game ball to enter the first starting ball entry section via the first path. By doing so, the internal lottery can be executed. Further, since the reverse ball entry means is arranged in the third path, the player can perform the internal lottery a predetermined number of times after shifting the reverse ball entry means from the closed state to the open state. , Even if the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the game ball is not allowed to enter the reverse ball entry means. Therefore, since the reverse ball entry means does not shift from the open state to the closed state, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Feature D3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D1 or the feature D2 of the present invention group
The variable ball entry means
A first ball entry section (each hole 533B, 533C) and a second ball entry section (hole 533A) for inserting a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means are provided.
The specific control start unit starts the game in the specific control state when the game ball enters the first ball entry unit and the second ball entry unit.
The game in the specific control state, which starts when the game ball enters the reversing ball entry means and the second ball entry section, starts when the game ball enters the first ball entry section. A gaming machine characterized by giving a player a higher value than a controlled gaming game.

According to the feature D3 of the present invention group, the game in the specific control state started when the game ball enters the reversing ball entry means and the second entry section is the entry of the game ball into the first entry section. Since the player is given a higher value than the game in the specific control state that starts at the time of the ball, the player can start the game in the specific control state by inserting the game ball into the variable ball entry means. , You will expect to enter the second ball entry section. Further, when the reversing ball entering means is shifted from the closed state to the open state by inserting the game ball into the variable ball entering means, the player uses the game state transition means to change the gaming state to the next time. After shifting to the specific control state, by letting the game ball enter the reversing ball entry means, the player has a higher value than the game in the specific control state that starts when the game ball enters the first entry portion. It is possible to start the game in the specific control state given to. Therefore, the gaming machine can expand the choices of the player and can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D3 of the present invention group,
The specific control start unit starts a game in the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out when the game ball enters the first ball entry unit, and the reverse ball entry means and the second ball entry means. By starting the game in the specific control state in which more game balls can be paid out than the predetermined number of game balls when the game balls enter the ball entry section, the game balls enter the first ball entry section. A gaming machine characterized in that a player is given a higher value than the gaming in the specific controlled state that starts when the ball enters the ball.

According to the feature D4 of the present invention group, the entry of the game ball into the second entry portion can start the game in the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the reverse entry means and The entry of a game ball into the second entry section is performed by starting a game in a specific controlled state in which more game balls can be paid out than a predetermined number of game balls. Since the player is given a higher value than the game in the specific control state that is started at the time of entering the ball, the player is required to enter the second ball entry portion when starting the game in the specific control state. You will expect it. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D4 of the present invention group,
An open / closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is allowed to enter, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter, and a predetermined game ball is paid out when the game ball enters. Equipped with means (variable winning device 38)
The specific control start unit is
After the opening / closing ball entry means is set to the open state and then set to the closed state again, the game (round game) in the specific control state is defined as one game.
The specific control start unit is
By setting the number of times of opening and closing of the opening / closing ball entering means to a predetermined number of times, the game in the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out is started, and the number of times of opening / closing of the opening / closing ball entering means is made larger than the predetermined number of times. A gaming machine characterized in that by setting the number of times of the above, a game in the specific controlled state is started, in which more gaming balls can be paid out than the predetermined number of gaming balls.

According to the feature D5 of the present invention group, the specific control start unit sets a predetermined number of times of opening and closing of the opening / closing ball entry means when the game ball enters the first ball entry unit, thereby performing a predetermined number of games. The game in the specific control state in which the ball can be paid out is started, and the number of times of opening and closing of the opening / closing ball entering means is set to be larger than the predetermined number of times when the game ball is entered into the reversing ball entering means and the second ball entering portion. As a result, a game in a specific control state in which more game balls can be paid out than a predetermined number of game balls is started. Therefore, when starting a game in the specific control state, the player goes to the second entry section. You will expect the ball to enter. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features D3 to D5 of the present invention group.
The variable ball entry means
A crune (cruin 53D) having a rolling surface (rolling surface 531) for rolling a game ball that has entered the variable ball entering means is provided.
A gaming machine characterized in that the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section are provided on the rolling surface and allow a gaming ball that rolls on the rolling surface to enter the ball.

According to the feature D6 of the present invention group, since the first entry portion and the second entry portion are provided on the rolling surface of the crune, the player can enter the variable ball entry means. You will pay attention to the whereabouts of the ball. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features D1 to D8 of the present invention group,
The inverted ball entry means
A first receiving portion (each blade member 571) that receives a game ball that has entered the inverted ball entering means, and
A second receiving portion (second arm portion 576C) for receiving a game ball that has entered the second entering portion is provided.
By receiving the game ball at the first receiving part, the state shifts from the open state to the closed state, and by receiving the game ball at the second receiving part, the state shifts from the closed state to the open state. A game machine to be.

According to the feature D7 of the present invention group, the reversing ball entering means shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball at the first receiving part, and receives the game ball at the second receiving part. As a result, the closed state is changed to the open state, so that the open / closed state can be changed using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other power such as electric power.

According to the feature D group of the present invention as described above, the player's choices can be expanded and the player's attention to the game can be improved, so that the following problems can be solved. ..

Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board is provided, and the game ball enters the operating port (starting ball entry means) to perform an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery. The gaming machine to run is known. When, for example, the gaming machine wins the jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.

However, after shifting the gaming state to the specific control state, the gaming machine follows the same flow regardless of whether or not the player's action is intervened, and then starts the game in the specific control state. There is a problem that the series of flow from shifting the game state to starting the game in the specific control state becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game decreases.

As described above, the present invention can be suitably used for gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines.

10 ... Pachinko machine, 35 ... General winning opening, 36 ... Upper operating port, 37 ... Lower operating port, 38 ... Variable winning device, 38a ... Large winning opening, 38b ... Opening and closing door, 38c ... Variable winning drive unit, 39 ... Out Mouth, 51 ... symbol display device, 60 ... main control device, 62 ... MPU, 90 ... voice emission control device, 92 ... MPU, 100 ... display control device, 102 ... MPU.

Claims (7)

A firing means for firing the game ball towards the game area formed in front of the game board, a possible game ball flowing down the ball entrance to the game area, capable of executing a predetermined drawing on the basis of the ball entrance A gaming machine including a starting ball entry means and a gaming state transition means capable of shifting the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player based on the result of the predetermined lottery.
And playing ball ball entrance can open flowing down the game area, and a playing ball impossible ball entrance closure state flowing down the gaming area, closed from the open state based on the ball entrance of game ball The first ball entry means to shift to
Based on the results of the predetermined lottery, the game area to allow ball entrance game ball which temporarily flows down, and the first ball entrance means based on the ball entrance of game ball from a closed state to an open state Equipped with a transferable second ball entry means,
The game state transition means
After migrating the gaming state to the specific control state, characterized in that it comprises a specific control starting means enabling to start a game of the specific control state based on at least a game ball entering the sphere to the first ball entrance hand stage A game machine to be. In the gaming machine according to claim 1,
The second ball entry means
A first ball-entry means and a second ball-entry means capable of entering a game ball that has entered the second ball-entry means are provided.
The game state transition means starts the game in the specific control state based on the entry of the game ball into the first entry means and the second entry means.
The game of the specific control state to start based on the game ball entering the sphere to the first ball entrance means and said second ball entrance means based on the game ball entering the sphere to the first ball entrance means A gaming machine characterized in that a player is given a higher value than the gaming in the specific controlled state. In the gaming machine according to claim 2.
The specific control start means, the first based on the game ball entering the sphere to ball entrance means to start a game of the specific control state Haraidaseru a predetermined number of game balls, the first ball entrance means and said By starting the game in the specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out based on the entry of the game balls into the second ball entry means , the first ball entry means A gaming machine characterized in that a player is given a higher value than the gaming in the specific control state, which is started based on the entry of the gaming ball into the player. In the gaming machine according to claim 3,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is allowed to enter, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter, and is opened and closed to pay out a predetermined game ball based on the entry of the game ball. Equipped with a means of entering the ball
The specific control starting means is
After the opening / closing ball entry means is set to the open state, the game is set to the closed state again as one game in the specific control state.
The specific control starting means is
By setting the number of times of opening and closing of the opening / closing ball entering means to a predetermined number of times, the game in the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out is started, and the number of times of opening / closing of the opening / closing ball entering means is made larger than the predetermined number of times. A gaming machine characterized in that by setting the number of times of the above, a game in the specific controlled state is started, in which more gaming balls can be paid out than the predetermined number of gaming balls. In the gaming machine according to any one of claims 2 to 4.
The second ball entry means
A crune having a rolling surface for rolling a game ball that has entered the second ball entry means is provided.
The first ball-entry means and the second ball-entry means are provided on the rolling surface and are characterized in that a gaming ball that rolls on the rolling surface is inserted. In the gaming machine according to any one of claims 2 to 5.
The first ball entry means
The first receiving means for receiving the game ball that has entered the first entering means, and the first receiving means.
And a second receiving means for receiving a game ball that ball entrance to the second ball entrance means,
By receiving the game ball by the first receiving means , the state shifts from the open state to the closed state, and by receiving the game ball by the second receiving means , the state shifts from the closed state to the open state. A game machine to be. In the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6.
The starting ball entry means
It is equipped with a first start ball entry means and a second start ball entry means.
The gaming machine
Said first start-up ball entrance liable to generate ball entrance of game ball into the means, the second start game balls of the first path is less likely to generate a ball entrance to ball entrance means,
Said second start ball entrance means tends to generate ball entrance of game ball into the first start-up game ball of the second path is difficult to generate a ball entrance to ball entrance means,
The first ball entry means arranged in the first path is provided.
The game state transition means
A first gaming state in which the probability of entering the second starting ball entering means is lower than that of the first starting ball entering means.
A second gaming state in which the probability of entering the second starting ball entering means is higher than that of the first starting ball entering means.
A gaming state switching means for switching between the first gaming state and the second gaming state is provided.
The gaming state switching means switches from the first gaming state to the second gaming state after finishing the game in the specific control state, executes the predetermined lottery a predetermined number of times, and then the second game state switching means. A gaming machine characterized by switching from a gaming state to the first gaming state.

Images